You are on page 1of 168

Baker Hughes INTEQ

MWD Log Quality and


Data Management Standards

Reference Manual

750-500-041

Rev. A

January 1996

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Technical Publications Group
2001 Rankin Road
Houston, TX 77032
USA
713-625-4415

This manual is provided without any warranty of any kind, either expressed
or implied. The information in this document is believed to be accurate;
however, Baker Hughes INTEQ will not be liable for any damages, whether
direct or indirect, which results from the use of any information contained
herein.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Chapter 1

Data Management
Labeling Floppy Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Data Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
MWD Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
M-SERIES Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
P-SERIES Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
RWD Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
M-SERIES Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
M-SERIES Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Raw Memory Dump Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
GetXfer Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Getdata Disks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
P-SERIES Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Additional Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Squeeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Quicken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
WTOB.EXE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
IMP2MPLT.EXE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
HTFX.EXE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
MEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Future Additions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Chapter 2

Log Preparation
Original Holes and Sidetracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Traces/Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Trace Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Pen-up Intervals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Recommendations for Scales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Rate of Penetration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Gamma Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

i
Confidential

Table of Contents

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Resistivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Neutron Porosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Bulk Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Density Porosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Photoelectric Cross Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Delta Rho Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Time Since Drilled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Data Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
True Vertical Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Log Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
See Remark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Trace Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Back Up Trace Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Casing Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Run Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
TD Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Sliding Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Comment Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
See Remark 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Exclamation Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Scale Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Trace Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Traces On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Guide to Comment.fil (Bryan Dugas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Comment.fil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
See Remarks X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Comment Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Trace Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Traces On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Scale Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Annotations Across . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Annotation Down From Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Annotation Down To Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Line Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Horizontal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Casing Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

ii

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Table of Contents

Gulton Plotter Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18


Manual Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Software Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Chapter 3

Headers
Miniheader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Full Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Main Header Page, Top Half . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Service Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Well Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
County . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Well Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Sect./Twp./Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
API Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Other Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Drilling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Elevation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Main Header Page, Bottom Half . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Borehole Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Casing Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Drilling Contractor/Rig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Log Type/Scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Print Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Company Representative/Teleco Representative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Job Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Main Header, Bit Run Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Surface Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Eastman Teleco OD/Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Run Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Mud Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Water Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Rm @ Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Company Representative/Eastman Teleco Field Engineer . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

iii
Confidential

Table of Contents

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Main Header, Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8


Equipment Serial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Sensor Offsets to Bit/Memory Acquisition Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Other Tool Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Main Header, Environmental Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Main Header, Calibration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
DPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Gamma Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Neutron Porosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Main Header, Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Chapter 4

Directional/Natural Gamma Ray


Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Mud Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Borehole Correction Inputs - Gamma Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Data Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Editing of Realtime Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Depth Shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
M-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
P-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
HPUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Rigsite Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Smoothing and/or Averaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
M-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
P-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
HPUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Borehole Corrections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Squeeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Quicken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
ADDTSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

iv

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Table of Contents

Postwell Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4


Before Final Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
After Final Logs - LIS ASCII File and Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Rigsite Calibration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Quality Control Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Data Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Time Since Drilled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Log Quality Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Typical Log Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Other Requirements for This Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Log Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
North and South America Log Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
International Log Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Chapter 5

Drilling Dynamics
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Mud Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Borehole Correction Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Gamma Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drilling Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Data Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Editing of Realtime Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Depth Shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
M-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
P-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
HPUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Rigsite Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Smoothing and/or Averaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
M-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
P-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
HPUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

v
Confidential

Table of Contents

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Borehole Corrections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Squeeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Quicken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
ADDTSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
ADDTVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
EWD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Postwell Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Before Final Logs - EWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
After Final Logs - LIS ASCII File and Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Rigsite Calibration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Log Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Typical Log Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Gamma Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Drilling Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Other Requirements for This Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Log Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
North and South America Log Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Plotting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Traces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
International Log Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Plotting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Traces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Chapter 6

Short Normal Resistivity


Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Mud Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Borehole Correction Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Gamma Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Short Normal Resistivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

vi

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Table of Contents

Data Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2


Editing of Realtime Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Depth Shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
M-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
P-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
HPUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Rigsite Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Smoothing and/or Averaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
M-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
P-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
HPUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Borehole Corrections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Squeeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Quicken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
ADDTSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
ADDTVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Postwell Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Before Final Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
After Final Logs - LIS ASCII File and Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Rigsite Calibration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Quality Control Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Data Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Time Since Drilled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Log Quality Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Typical Log Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Gamma Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Short Normal Resistivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Permeable Zones (No Hydrocarbons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Impermeable Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Other Requirements for This Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Log Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
North and South America Log Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
International Log Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

vii
Confidential

Table of Contents

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Chapter 7

Dual Propagation Resistivity


Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Mud Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Borehole Correction Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Gamma Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Dual Propagation Resistivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Data Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Editing of Realtime Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Editing of Memory Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Depth Shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
M-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
MDMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
P-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
HPUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Rigsite Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Smoothing and/or Averaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
M-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
MDMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
P-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
HPUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Borehole Corrections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Dielectric Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Squeeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Quicken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
ADDTSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
ADDTVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Postwell Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Before Final Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Dielectric Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
After Final Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Postwell WDS Log Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
LIS ASCII File and Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

viii

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Table of Contents

Rigsite Calibration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7


Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Quality Control Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Data Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Time Since Drilled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Log Quality Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Typical Log Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Gamma Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Dual Propagation Resistivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Permeable Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Impermeable Zones (Shales) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Dielectric Formations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Thin Beds Intersecting Borehole at High Incident Angles
(Above 80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Eccentricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Other Requirements for This Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Log Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
North and South America Log Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
International Log Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Chapter 8

Double Combo
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Mud Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Borehole Correction Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Gamma Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Dual Propagation Resistivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Modular Neutron Porosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Data Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Editing of Realtime Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Editing of Memory Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Depth Shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
M-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
MDMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
P-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
HPUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

ix
Confidential

Table of Contents

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Rigsite Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4


Smoothing and/or Averaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
M-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
MDMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
P-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
HPUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Borehole Corrections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Dielectric Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Squeeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Quicken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
ADDTSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
ADDTVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
WDS Quicklook Log Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Postwell Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Before Final Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Dielectric Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
After Final Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Postwell WDS Log Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
LIS ASCII File and Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Rigsite Calibration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Quality Control Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Data Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Time Since Drilled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Log Quality Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Typical Log Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Gamma Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Dual Propagation Resistivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Permeable Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Impermeable Zones (Shales) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Dielectric Formations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Thin Beds Intersecting Borehole at High Incident Angles
(Above 60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Eccentricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Table of Contents

Modular Neutron Porosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10


Clean Reservoir Rocks Filled with Either Water or Oil . . . . . . 8-10
Clean Reservoir Rocks Filled with Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Shale Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Other Requirements for This Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Log Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
North and South America Log Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
International Log Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Special Logging Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Near/Far Count Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Pitfalls to This Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Recommendations: "Methodology" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Chapter 9

Triple Combo
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Mud Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Borehole Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Gamma Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Dual Propagation Resistivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Modular Neutron Porosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Modular Density Lithology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Data Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Editing of Realtime Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Editing of Memory Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Depth Shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
M-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
MDMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
P-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
HPUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Rigsite Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Smoothing and/or Averaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
M-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
MDMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
P-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
HPUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

xi
Confidential

Table of Contents

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Despiking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Hanning Window Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Chi Square Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Borehole Corrections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Dielectric Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Squeeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Quicken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
ADDTSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
ADDTVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Quicklook WDS Log Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Postwell Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Before Final Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Dielectric Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
After Final Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Postwell WDS Log Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
LIS ASCII File and Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Rigsite Calibration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Quality Control Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Data Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Time Since Drilled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Delta Rho (Dr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Log Quality Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Typical Log Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Gamma Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Dual Propagation Resistivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Permeable Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Impermeable Zones (Shales) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Dielectric Formations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Thin Beds Intersecting Borehole at High Incident Angles
(Above 60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Eccentricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Modular Neutron Porosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Clean Reservoir Rocks Filled with Either Water or Oil . . . . . . 9-11
Clean Reservoir Rocks Filled with Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Shale Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
xii

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Table of Contents

Modular Density Lithology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11


Permeable Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Impermeable Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Other Requirements for This Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Log Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
North and South America Log Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Combined Log Formats (Triple Combo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Segregated Log Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
International Log Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Combined Log Formats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Segregated Log Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Appendix A

Mnemonics Listing
Axis Magnetic Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Attenuation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Axial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Azimuth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Bending Moment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Bulk Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Conductivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Dip Angle (Magnetic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Density (Photoelectric Cross Section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Delta Rho . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Drilling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Gamma Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Gravity (Accelerometer, Raw). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Highside Toolface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Horizontal Magnetic Field (Magnetometer, Raw). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Inclination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Lag Strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Magnetic Tool Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Neutron Porosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Phase Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Data Density/Elapsed Time calculated from MDMS/P-SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
DPR 2A Self Calibration Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Resistivity (Attenuation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Resistivity (Mud) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

xiii
Confidential

Table of Contents

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Rate of Penetration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resistivity (Phase Difference) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resistivity (Short Normal). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resistance (Short Normal). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standpipe Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Strokes (Pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Total Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Total Magnetic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque (Rotary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
True Vertical Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight On Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-11
A-11
A-12
A-12
A-13
A-13
A-13
A-13
A-13
A-14
A-14
A-14
A-14
A-14

Appendix B

Chart Calibration and Accuracy Test


Chart Accuracy (ST-250). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
Invoking Chart Calibration and Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
Calibration Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3
Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3
Chart Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3
Gulton Wellogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Multiscan Operating Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
Multiscan Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
Multiscan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
Manual Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
Software Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
Software Version 3.00 Chart Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
Manual Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
Software Command Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
Step Accuracy Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
Gultcal Software Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-7
TABLE 1: Dip Switch Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-8
TABLE 2: Dip Switch Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-15

xiv

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Chapter

Data Management
This chapter provides the proper procedures for labeling
floppy disks and backing up data to ensure software
compatibility and consistent management of data collected.

Labeling Floppy Disks


It is required that all data disks returning from a job be properly labeled as
either Job Data, Raw/Edit Data, EP-1, D-Map, or Text. Every disk
should have the job number, company, OCS-G/well number, location, and
rig. In addition, every data disk should have beginning and ending depths
as well as beginning and ending date and time. Avoid complicated
numbering schemes for your data disks in the event you do a lot of reaming
or change from one service type to another (such as going from RGD to
DPR).
When labeling your disks, use a pen with quick-drying ink. Allow the ink
to dry before handling the disk or label (this will avoid smearing the ink
and leaving the disk label illegible, which seems to be a common
occurrence). Also avoid using a large broad tip marker (Marks-a-Lot) to
label run numbers. Use a fine to medium tip marker instead.

Data Back Up
The number of MS-DOS utility packages available to the personal
computer user are rapidly increasing. Many of these packages have
redundant capabilities such as data back up and data compression. As a
personal computer user, you may have your own special utility package
that you prefer to use. However, it is extremely important that you leave
your package at home and use the utility packages provided in the HPUTIL
main menu. This ensures upward and downward software compatibility in

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

1-1
Confidential

Data Management

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

every release of Teleco's surface software products. This also permits easy
data manipulation for any data collected.

MWD Services
M-SERIES Systems
After all final logs are generated, back up all replay files to high density
floppy disks. If the replay file (binary file) is relatively small (i.e., less than
1.1 megabytes), then copy the files directly to disk. If the file is larger, you
need to back up the data using the Fastback Utilities program available
from the HPUTIL main menu. The Fastback version used has been
upgraded to version 2.10. This version will read earlier versions of
Fastback disks, but the disks created by 2.10 cannot be read by earlier
versions of Fastback. If you are unfamiliar with using this utilities
program, contact your supervisor for guidance. It is important to note that
during the job, you should always retain a copy of the original unedited
raw data.
The files that are required for back up are as follows:

binary.* (this includes binary.fil, .idx, .uni, .apd)

*.cfg (header information), use this with HPUTIL Rev. 2.1 or


greater

setup.fil (Mplot/Wplot formats...formally newplot.fil)

log.fil (Makelog/Head/Minihead formats)

tvddata.fil

newplot.fil (use with HPUTIL versions earlier than Rev. 2.1)

header.fil (use with HPUTIL versions earlier than Rev. 2.1)

comment.fil

mserdb.133 (M-SERIES ASCII definition file)

P-SERIES Systems
All data is periodically backed up automatically to magnetic tape. Provide
all job information and run numbers on each tape. If MPLOT in HPUTIL is
used for plotting logs, a P-SERIES.Xfer file must be transferred into the
HPUTIL directory so a binary file can be generated. In this case, back up
the appropriate files as you would for an MWD M-SERIES system (see the
preceding section). At the job's completion, you should have a set of disks
with the binary.fil data and a set of P-SERIES magnetic cassette tapes.

1-2

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Data Management

RWD Services
M-SERIES Systems
In an effort to reduce the voluminous number of disks and different types
of data disks returning from RWD jobs (i.e., xfer.fil, Getdata, raw memory,
M-SERIES real-time data, etc.), please follow the recommended procedure
for collection and storage of RWD data. The procedures also help conserve
memory on the hard disk.
There are four types of data disks that need to be saved during the course of
a downhole memory job when using an M-SERIES system. These are the
M-SERIES real-time data disks, raw memory dump data disks, and
Getdata and GetXfer data disks. All disks should be labeled with the job
number, company, OCS-G number and well number, rig, and depth in and
out and volume number, regardless of the type of disk label used. This
becomes increasingly important when several sidetracks are drilled from
the same job.
M-SERIES Disks
Using a standard floppy disk label, make sure every disk is fully labeled,
including time/date and depth in and out. Also, be sure to label the
M-SERIES software revision number in the upper left-hand side of the
label and the disk number in the upper right-hand side.
Raw Memory Dump Disks
Standard (generic) disk labels can be used for these disks. You should back
up memory dump data after each dump (run). Each memory dump needs to
be stored on a separate set of disks. Label these as Mem Dump 1, Mem
Dump 2, etc. Besides the information recommended above (i.e., job
number, company, OCS-G number and well number, rig, and depth in and
out), include any time offsets that were used for processing and the MDMS
revision number in the upper left-hand corner of the disk label.
GetXfer Disks
Use a standard (generic) disk label for these disks. Label these disks as
GetXfer, volume (example: GetXfer, vol. 1 of 1). The directory for
GetXfer is automatically named GetXfer. The volume label is a
reference to the disk number and total number of disks used when the
GetXfer file is backed up to floppy disk using the Fastback Utilities
program. Make sure to provide all other pertinent well information on the
disk label that is required on the other disks.
The GetXfer executable is accessed in the HPUTIL main menu. This
routine allows us to store the Xfer file selectively. When GetXfer is
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

1-3
Confidential

Data Management

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

performed, a directory in the D:\ drive is created. The Xfer.fil is then


compressed using PKARC and then copied into the Xfer directory. The
engineer is required to perform a GetXfer at the completion of each run
(i.e., memory dump) after all the memory data for that run has been
processed.
Perform GetXfer on the D:\ drive. When performing the GetXfer program,
name each run as Xfer1.ARC, Xfer2.ARC, Xfer3.ARC (Xfer file from
run 1,2,3, etc.). Relog sections should be listed as Xrl1.ARC, Xrl2.ARC,
Xrl3.ARC (for Xfer file from relog 1,2,3, etc.). After a GetXfer is
performed, back up the GetXfer directory onto floppy disks using the
Fastback Utilities program (see Proper Sequence for Executing a GetXfer
and Getdata on page 1-7).
After the Xfer file has been backed up on the D:\ drive using the GetXfer
utility program, delete the Xfer file from the C:\ drive. This is done to
avoid duplication of data storage (i.e., storing the Xfer file on both the
GetXfer and Getdata directories and data disks).
Getdata Disks
Use a standard (generic) disk label for these disks. Label these disks as
Getdata, directory (job number), volume, (example: Getdata \3250,
Vol. 2 of 2). Always use the job number as the directory name. Make sure
to provide all other pertinent well information on the disk label, which is
required on the other data disk types. Getdata backs up any file in the
HPUTIL directory that has a .fil or .cgf extension. The Getdata routine
is accessed through the HPUTIL main menu. A Getdata should be
performed at the end of each run. If you are on a job that uses both RGD
and DPR tools, make sure the binary files for each tool type are merged or
appended together prior to data back up. It is important to note that a
Getdata should not be performed until a GetXfer has been executed and the
Xfer file is subsequently deleted from the C:\ drive. After the Xfer file has
been deleted from the C:\ drive, run Squeeze and Quicken, which will
significantly reduce the size of your binary file. You are now ready to
execute a Getdata (see Proper Sequence for Executing a GetXfer and
Getdata on page 1-7).
Perform all of your Getdata on the D:\ drive. When Getdata is performed,
store and label each run as Run1.ARC, Run2.ARC, Run3.ARC, etc. Run
numbers should correspond to the correct bit run on the log header. After
the Getdata has been executed, back up the Getdata to floppy disk using the
Fastback Utilities program. It is imperative that a Getdata be performed at
the completion of the last run, which includes the appended binary file for
the entire job.
If changes are made to the database (e.g., comment.fil, *.cfg, etc.) after a
Getdata was performed, another Getdata should be executed and backed up
1-4

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Data Management

to disk to update the database. The idea is, in the event that logs have to be
remade at a later date by either the engineer from the job or staff personnel,
all of the information is readily available and will not have to be updated or
recreated.
P-SERIES Systems
At the operator's option, all data is periodically backed up automatically to
magnetic tape at a user selected time interval (every 30 minutes is
recommended). Provide all job information and run numbers on each tape.
If MPLOT in HPUTIL is used for plotting logs, a P-SERIES Xfer file must
be copied into the HPUTIL directory so a binary file can be generated. In
this case, back up the appropriate files to disk using the Getdata routine in
HPUTIL (see the preceding section). At the job's completion, you should
have a set of Getdata disks and P-SERIES magnetic cassette tapes for the
entire job.

Additional Data Management


Squeeze
Squeeze is a program that is accessed through the HPUTIL main menu and
is designed to compress the binary.fil in HPUTIL. The compression is done
by discarding all deleted records, removing all backplotted records, and
averaging the data to a resolution of 0.25 feet (0.10 meters). In addition, the
resistivity values are recomputed from conductivity to provide a more
precise approximation than just averaging the resistivities. After Squeeze is
finished processing, the data in the binary.fil is replaced in an ordered
structure. The surface records are listed first, then directional, temperature,
memory data, etc. This ordering however, poses some problems for the
editor in MPLOT UTILITIES (DMD editor), such as time and depth
searches. Therefore, use MEDIT to edit any squeezed files. There is also a
Squeeze executable for XFER files in the HPUTIL main menu. Its
functionality is identical to the Squeeze used for binary files.
Quicken
Quicken is also accessed from the HPUTIL main menu and is designed to
speed up the searching routine for data when using MPLOT or MEDIT. It
accomplishes this by creating a table of indices for each 100 feet of log.
These indices allow MPLOT or MEDIT to jump to a point within 100 feet
of the start depth of the log (or in the case of MEDIT, within 100 feet of the
depth you are searching for), thus making it a lot quicker for searching.
Quicken should be run after any program that modifies the binary.fil. This
would include appending to a binary.fil, or executing ADDTVD,
ADDTSD, and/or Squeeze.
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

1-5
Confidential

Data Management

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

WTOB.EXE
This is a new program that copies a curve from a WDF file and either
converts it to a binary.fil or writes it to a pre-existing binary file.
IMP2MPLT.EXE
This program imports an ASCII file into MPLOT. It is similar to the
MARC I ASCII file import.
HTFX.EXE
This program creates line commands for the sliding indicator (see
Comment Files on page 2-11).
MEDIT
MEDIT is an editor for the binary.fil that has been compiled for use in the
HPUTIL main menu. MEDIT is used to view/edit the binary.fil in the
HPUTIL directory. Use the Up/Down arrow keys and the PgUp/PgDn keys
to highlight the record type you wish to edit. Press [ENTER] to select a
particular record type. Use the [F2] key for the Depth Search option. All
changes to a file are permanent as soon as you change to another page or
exit. If you do not leave the page, press [F1] to abort the edit and the
original contents of the page will be restored. Always use MEDIT on a
squeezed file. This will greatly reduce the search time when doing a depth
search.
Future Additions
Future additions include the ability to convert binary files to TIF (Tape
Image Files). This can be used to transmit data via fax or for rapid plotting
of multiple log copies (MPLOT/WPLOT ver. 3.1).

1-6

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Data Management

Proper Sequence for Executing a GetXfer and Getdata

Process memory data using MDMS. An Xfer file


is automatically created and copied over to the
DOS side on the C:\ drive.

Build a replay file using the Xfer file (this converts the Xfer
file to a binary file) and append to the current binary file.

Execute Squeeze
and Quicken.

Run a verification
log to check data.

Execute GetXfer on the D:\ drive. Name runs as Xfer1.ARC,


Xfer2.ARC, Xrlg1.ARC, Xrlg2.ARC, etc.

Delete Xfer file on the C:\ drive.

Back up GetXfer file to floppy disk using


Fastback Utilities program.

Execute Getdata on the D:\ drive.


Name runs as Run1.ARC, Run2.ARC, etc.

Back up Getdata file on the D:\ drive to floppy disk using


Fastback Utilities program.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

1-7
Confidential

Data Management

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

1-8

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Chapter

Log Preparation
This chapter provides specific instructions on generating
various logs for original holes and sidetracks.
Recommendations for plotting traces and scales and
generating log annotations and comments are explained in
detail.

Note: Since depth scales for logs vary greatly between districts,
it would be difficult to include all of these each time the
subject of depth scales is referred to within this
document. However, for any area, logs are generally
presented with two depth scales that can be loosely
defined as 1) correlation log scales and 2) quantitative
log scales.
Correlation logs are typically plotted with smaller depth
scales such as 1:600, 1:1200 English or 1:1000 metric.
Quantitative logs are plotted with larger scales for
quantitative analysis; typical scales are 1:240 English or
1:200 metric. All depth scales referred to beyond this
point in this document are referenced as either
correlation or quantitative log scales.
Regardless of customer requests on location, it is required that both 1- or 2and 5-inch Measured Depth and True Vertical Depth Field and Final logs
be generated at the end of a job. True Vertical Depth logs should be
omitted if a vertical hole was logged. Two copies of field prints should be
left on location.
When generating logs from the HPUTIL main menu, it is recommended to
use the Make Log utility program. This utility permits the logging engineer
to configure the header layout, log formats, and the configurations
(annotations, trace labels, casing labels, etc.) from one screen. These
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

2-1
Confidential

Log Preparation

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

configurations can be stored for later use. The major advantage to this
feature is headers can be individually matched to logs and comment files.
Once your configuration is set up and plotting is invoked, both header and
log are plotted sequentially.

Original Holes and Sidetracks


Engineers should treat original holes and sidetracks as separate wells. This
means that the engineer should generate final logs and directional surveys
for the original well, which should be completed and turned in before the
start of the sidetrack. This data is finalized and sent to the customer. This is
necessary because the client typically uses this data to plan the sidetrack
wells.
If the engineers remain on location, they should make every attempt to
generate final logs for the original hole and back up to floppy disk (or tape
for P-SERIES) all appropriate data, including directional surveys, and send
everything to the office. Only one End of Well Report, which summarizes
the activities from both the original and sidetrack well, is necessary and
should be turned in at the completion of the last sidetrack well.
Each sidetrack should have a separate header for that particular sidetrack.
The first Eastman Teleco run number (in the Bit Run Summary) for each
sidetrack header should succeed the last Eastman Teleco run number on the
original hole or the sidetrack before that, unless the sidetrack well is
considered as a new well by the operator. A new well status is usually
applied if the bottom-hole location of the sidetrack well falls in another
block.
When making final logs for the sidetrack well, the beginning of the log
should correspond with the beginning of the sidetrack. Do not make a
composite log that includes any portion of the original hole above the
sidetrack unless specifically requested by the customer.
If you are requested to make composite logs, make sure to include a remark
in the Remarks page indicating that the bit run information for the portion
of log above the sidetrack can be found on the headers for the original log.

Traces/Scales
Trace Coding
The objective of using different line types is to distinguish between
different types of measurements plotted together in the same track (i.e.,
phase difference/attenuation resistivities, neutron porosity/formation
density, or conductivity/weight on bit, etc.). Therefore, unless you are
2-2

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Log Preparation

plotting more than one parameter together in any one track, all primary
trace curves should be represented by solid lines only. The only exception
to this is the back up scale for conductivity (see conductivity scale in RGD/
DPR log formats) Both short normal curves in track 2 on the correlation
log format are plotted as solid lines. However, if you are plotting apparent
resistivities with corrected resistivities, the corrected resistivity should be
coded with a medium dashed line.
Pen-up Intervals
Pen-up intervals should not exceed 10 feet (3 meters). The only exception
to this is when plotting TVD for a horizontal well or tool temperature
(TCDX, TCDM). There is no reason to use a pen-up interval greater than
10 feet (3 meters), regardless of data density. You are strongly discouraged
from doing so. Any data gaps and the reasons for their occurrence should
be documented in the Remarks page of the Log Header (see Main Header,
Remarks on page 3-10). Pen-up intervals are referred to as Interpolation
Limits in 1.3x M-SERIES software.

Recommendations for Scales


Use standard scales for traces where possible. However, when secondary
traces continuously interfere with the primary trace or curve, scale
adjustments may be necessary. When it does become necessary to change
scales, always contact the geologist and/or engineer in the office who is
watching the well and request preferred scales and formats. Always
perform a scale change on secondary curves before primary curves. If scale
changes are made to both secondary and primary curves and interference
still exists, it may be necessary to move the secondary curve to another
track or remove it from the log. Once again, consult the client for the
preferred location of traces.
Rate of Penetration
The rate of penetration is included on all logs unless otherwise requested
by the client. This includes morning and afternoon field logs as well. Rate
of penetration is plotted on a linear grid but variable scale. It is typically
presented with Gamma Ray in track 1 or with Conductivity or Weight
on Bit in track 3. The scale should always begin with 0 on the right side of
the track with increasing rate of penetration towards the left. This provides
correlation of the sands and shales with Gamma Ray in track 1. The scale
should be set up to allow minimum interference with the primary curve
(gamma ray, conductivity, or weight on bit). This may require a scale of
1000 to 0 ft/hr if the rate of penetration is high. Also explore the Scale
Change option when the rate of penetration decreases or increases (see
page 2-12 and page 2-15).

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

2-3
Confidential

Log Preparation

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

It is important to note that when using MPLOT, select 5DSH (for


correlation logs) and 2DSH (for quantitative logs) under the selection line
type. Trace coding and curve averaging are provided automatically. For
example, for 2DSH, a histogram will be plotted as a medium dashed line
with a 2-foot average. This means that no additional averaging or
smoothing should be selected under MPLOT when preparing to plot the
rate of penetration.
Gamma Ray
It is important to set the scale range so that individual divisions on the trace
scale are whole numbers (for example, each division on a scale from 25 to
225 API is equal to 20 units, each division on a scale from 50 to 150 API is
equal to 10 units, etc., as opposed to a scale of 50 to 275 API, where each
division would be equal to 22.5 units). This is an API industry standard
because it simplifies reading the curve.
Your scale should be set up to accommodate recommended divisions of
either 10, 15, 20, or 25 units. Anything beyond 25 is generally too large
because the separation between the sand and shale base line may be too
small for adequate differentiation of lithologies.
The scale should also be arranged so the gamma trace is centered in track 1.
If the curve becomes weighted to one side of the track (i.e., becomes
increasingly sandy or shaly) as you increase in depth, it may be necessary
to perform a scale change (see page 2-12 and page 2-15). If a scale change
does not seem appropriate, pick the scale that works best through the zones
of interest.
When plotting the gamma ray in track 1, you should set up your scaling to
maximize the separation between the shale base line and the sand line.
Ideally, you would shoot for a 4 to 6 division separation. However, when
plotting a secondary trace in the same track as gamma ray, such as rate of
penetration, the above recommendations often cannot be adhered to. The
gamma ray trace must be compressed in order to accommodate the
secondary trace. The following suggestions may be helpful.
1.

Compress the secondary trace (i.e., rate of penetration) scale as


much as possible before compressing the gamma ray.
Remember, MPLOT will do scale changes on the fly for any
trace.

2.

Since a 6 division separation between sand and shale may not be


feasible, shoot for a 4 division separation (anything less than 4
divisions is not recommended). This may require using scales
that we are not accustomed to, but still allow for divisions that
are divisible by whole numbers. For example, with a scale from
30 to 180 or 80 to 230, each division equals 15.

2-4

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Log Preparation

Note: Note the different smoothing intervals for the gamma ray
MWD API trace on the 1-, 2-, and 5-inch logs. Always
use a smaller smoothing interval for the higher rates of
penetration.
Resistivity
The scale for both correlation and quantitative logs will vary for different
locations. Consult the client for preferred scales and formats. As a
standard, plot apparent resistivities on all logs for RGD services unless
specifically requested by the customer. For the DPR service, plot corrected
phase difference and amplitude ratio resistivities.
In the event that you need to change your resistivity scale due to anomalous
readings that obscure the trace, use the following standards:
For correlation logs, your amplified measurement is always 1/5 the
unamplified scale. For example:
Default scale:

Change scale to:

unamplified = 0.0 to 10.0


amplified = 0.0 to 2.0

unamplified = 0.0 to 20.0


amplified = 0.0 to 4.0

Or:
unamplified = 0.0 to 50.0
amplified = 0.0 to 10.0
Note: An X10 scale is available (on MPLOT) as a back up
scale. This is typically used for linear resistivity scales
(common in the Western Region) on all correlation logs
for the 0 to 10 scale (see correlation log formats for the
RGD and DPR Services). When the 0 to 10 scale wraps
around (when resistivity exceeds 10 ohm-m) the back-up
scale automatically switches to 0 to 100 scale. The backup trace will begin at the first division beyond the lefthand track edge (this division equals 10 ohm-m).
If the X-10 scale is used, a remark should be provided
that explains that the back-up scale is a X-10 scale.
Although this is a typical format for wireline 1- or 2-inch
logs, it is new to our MWD/RWD logs. A remark will
avoid any confusion for anyone reading the log.
For a quantitative log, the resistivity trace is ordinarily plotted on a two
cycle semi-logarithmic scale. In order to increase the scale, increase from 2
cycles to 4 cycles. This is a standard procedure in the logging industry. For
example:
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

2-5
Confidential

Log Preparation

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Increase from 2 to 4 cycles:

2-cycle = 0.2 - 20.0


4-cycle = 0.2 - 2000.0

A 4-cycle semi-logarithmic format should always occupy both tracks II


and III (this will require you to sacrifice any other traces in track III). This
prevents the scale from becoming too compressed in only one track. To do
this, just set up track II with a 2-cycle semi-log scale from 0.2 to 20.0, and
track III with a 2-cycle semi-log scale from 20.0 to 2000.0.
Note: Make note of the change from +/- wrap to the over option
for the resistivity trace in track 2 for quantitative logs.
This option is now available on MPLOT and should be
used wherever possible.
Conductivity
This trace is plotted commonly in areas characterized by low resistivity
formations such as the Gulf Coast. This scale will also vary for different
locations. It is always plotted on a linear grid, a default scale of which is
typically 4000 to 0000 mmhos. Where space permits (i.e., extra traces are
available for plotting), plot a back-up trace for conductivity (typically this
would be 8000 to 4000 mmhos-meter). This trace is coded as a medium
dashed line. If no space is available for extra traces, use the wrap or backup feature for plotting. In either case, the back-up trace should be annotated
as CSAX back up or CPCM back up on your logs (see Back Up Trace
Labels on page 2-10).
Neutron Porosity
This scale is variable but always on a linear grid. In clastic formations
(sand and shale), the scale is typically 60 to 0 porosity units. In carbonates
(limestones), the scale is 45 to -15 porosity units. On correlation logs, this
trace is plotted in track 3. On quantitative log scales, the trace is either
plotted across tracks 2 and 3, or only in track 3. This trace is plotted as a
solid line in double combo presentations (because it is a primary curve) and
as a medium dashed line for triple combo presentations. Consult the client
for preferred scales and formats.
Bulk Density
This scale is variable, but always on a linear grid. The default scale is 2.0 to
3.0 g/cc (for a limestone matrix). Scales for clastic formations will vary for
each region but a default scale that matches the neutron porosity 60 to 0
porosity units scale is 1.65 to 2.65 g/cc. Bulk density on correlation logs is
typically plotted only in track 3. On quantitative logs, it is typically plotted
across tracks 2 and 3 or only in track 3. This trace is plotted as a solid line.
Consult the client for preferred scales and formats.
2-6

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Log Preparation

Density Porosity
This scale is variable (but always on a linear grid) to match the neutron
porosity scale. In clastics (sands and shales), the scale is 60 to 0 porosity
units. In carbonates (limestones), the scale is 45 to -15 porosity units. On
correlation logs, this trace is plotted in track 3 with neutron porosity. On
quantitative logs, the trace is plotted either across tracks 2 and 3 or only in
track 3 with neutron porosity. This trace is plotted as a solid line. Consult
the client for preferred scales and formats.
Photoelectric Cross Section
The default scale is 0 to 10 barnes/electron, which is plotted on a linear
grid. The scale may be manipulated to move the trace out of the way of the
primary curves (keep track divisions as whole numbers). This trace is
generally reserved for quantitative logs. It is plotted as a heavy dashed line
in track 3 (when Bulk Density or Density Porosity is plotted across
tracks 2 and 3), or in track 3 as a half track presentation (when Bulk
Density or Density Porosity is plotted only in track 3). This currently is
not a commercial measurement!
Delta Rho Correction
The default scale is - 0.25 to 0.25 g/cc, which is plotted on a linear grid.
Although the scale can be manipulated to move it out of the way of the
primary curves, the same sensitivity should be maintained (i.e., - 0.5 to
0.20 g/cc). This curve is generally reserved for quantitative logs. It is
plotted in track 3 as a medium spot line (when Bulk Density or Density
Porosity is plotted across tracks 2 and 3), or in track 3 as a half track
presentation (when Bulk Density or Density Porosity is plotted in only
track 3). Consult the client for preferred scales and formats.
Time Since Drilled
Time Since Drilled is a trace that is automatically calculated in
P-SERIES and MDMS software systems and is referred to as Elapsed
Time. This trace is also calculated from the executable ADDTSD in the
HPUTIL main menu (run ADDTSD after the binary file in HPUTIL has
been constructed). It is important to note that there are differences between
these traces. Most notably P-SERIES/MDMS calculates elapsed time on a
run-by-run basis, which means the trace is interrupted at the end and
beginning of runs. Use this trace only if HPUTIL and MPLOT are not
available for generating logs. The ADDTSD executable calculates Time
Since Drilled continuously from top to bottom so there are no
interruptions in the trace. The ADDTSD executable also gives you much
more flexibility in selecting traces you can calculate TSD from, such as
phase difference resistivity, gamma ray, etc. This is the trace of choice. Be
careful when selecting mnemonics for plotting. Use mnemonics that are
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

2-7
Confidential

Log Preparation

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

defined as Time Since Drilled (for example, RPTM - Time Since Drilled
from Phase Difference Resistivity [RWD]).
This trace is plotted on linear grids only and reserved for quantitative logs.
The default track for Time Since Drilled is track 3. However, it may be
moved over to the first track for Triple Combo presentations to avoid
competition with other traces or when a logarithmic grid is used in track 3.
The default scale from 0 to 300 minutes (increasing from left to right
should be used in conjunction with a medium spot line type. It is not
recommended to use a scale smaller than 0 600 minutes. Since a medium
spot line type is similar to a medium dashed line (the back up scale for
conductivity), make sure to identify the back up conductivity trace as
CSAX back up or CPCM back up.
Note: Plot Time Since Drilled with the X-10 Mode (see
Note in Resistivity on page 2-5) to avoid multiple trace
wraps where bit trips and long periods of circulation
occur.
Data Density
Data density is another data type that is automatically calculated by the
P-SERIES/MDMS software systems. This trace is also calculated with
Time Since Drilled from the ADDTSD executable in the HPUTIL main
menu (run ADDTSD after the binary file in HPUTIL has been
constructed). The Data Density calculated from ADDTSD is the trace of
choice for plotting. Data density should be plotted as tick marks on the left
side of the depth track on quantitative logs. Make sure to move any
annotated Run Markers to the right side of the depth track.
True Vertical Depth
True vertical depth is another new trace added for horizontal wells. It is
calculated from the ADDTVD executable in the HPUTIL main menu. It
should be plotted on both correlation and quantitative logs in track 1 as a
heavy spot line type with a variable scale (the scale will depend on the true
vertical depths calculated in the lateral portion of the hole), which should
increase from right to left. If scaled appropriately, the TVD trace can be
used in conjunction with the gamma ray and/or resistivity traces to identify
when the bit enters and exits the objective zone.

2-8

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Log Preparation

Log Annotations
Note: Annotations for logs are constructed using the control
file comment.fil (see page 2-13).
See Remark
Follow the recommendations in the Remarks section (see page 3-10). All
remarks should be referenced on the log by the See Remark annotation.
If the See Remark refers to a particular depth interval, position the
reference in between the top and bottom of the interval instead of at the top
or bottom of the interval. Do this unless the interval to be remarked is
several hundred feet in depth on the log.
Trace Labels
Trace labels should be placed within the first 100 feet and last 100 feet of
each log. If your log is only a few hundred feet in length, such as a relog or
morning log, it may not be necessary to supply trace labels at both the top
and the bottom of the log (i.e., avoid crowding the log with too much
information). Examine TVD logs carefully for this! In addition, trace labels
should be provided at intermediate points on quantitative logs and lengthy
correlation logs. As a rule, these should be spaced approximately every
five feet, or 1.5 meters, on both quantitative and correlation logs. It is
important to remember that the trace labels may need to be adjusted so they
are evenly spaced on the log. It is better to have fewer trace labels than too
many trace labels. Also, avoid placing trace labels in pay zones or areas of
interest.
Also, always make sure trace labels are provided where one service ends
and another service begins on the log (i.e., where RGD converts to DPR).
If large gaps are present on the log due to tool failures, or intervals that
were drilled without Eastman Teleco, etc., provide trace labels where the
traces end and begin again. Depending on the length of the gap, it may not
be necessary to do this for the correlation log, but it should always be done
for the quantitative log presentation.
When plotting correlation DPR logs with linear grids (such as the Gulf
Coast), trace labels are required for both Rat and Rpd on the 0 to 10 scale as
well as Rpd on the 0 to 2 scale. It is acceptable to position the trace labels
for the 0 to 10 scale to the left of the traces, which will probably put the
trace labels in the depth track (see log examples at the end of each chapter
for service descriptions). Make sure that the trace labels are positioned
such that they do not interfere with depth labels, run markers, casing
markers, etc. Also take care to make sure the Rat trace label accurately
points to the Rat trace (dashed curve) and the Rpd trace label points to the
Rpd trace (solid line). As a rule, when the Rat and Rpd traces overlap one
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

2-9
Confidential

Log Preparation

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

another, place Rat on the left side and Rpd on the right side of the
overlapping traces.
Back Up Trace Labels
Make sure back up traces are labeled when plotted. They should be labeled
as CSAX back up ->. These are entered as a freeform remark using the
Annotations Across option (see page 2-15). This is done primarily for the
conductivity trace.
Casing Markers
Always include casing markers in the depth track on all final logs
regardless of whether the casing marker overlaps with a depth label. Also
identify the casing markers with the size of the casing (for example,
13-3/8 casing, see log examples at the end of each chapter for service
descriptions). Attempt to place this inside of the casing unless space is a
factor. This is done using the Annotations Across option (see page 2-15).
Also make sure to reposition your casing markers appropriately for 5-inch
logs. Casing markers can also be generated manually by using the Line
Annotation option for comment.fil (see page 2-16).
If we log out of casing and this is recorded on the log, mark the casing
according to the log, not at the depth recorded by the driller. If there is a
discrepancy in depths, make note of it in the Remarks page. List separately
the driller's casing depth and Teleco's casing depth (see log examples at the
end of each chapter for service descriptions). It is also important to note
those intervals of log that have been logged behind casing.
Run Markers
Identify run markers on the right side of the depth track where runs begin
and end. If there are any runs that overlap one another, these runs need to
be entered by hand using the Annotations Down To and Annotations
Down From Depth options (see page 2-16). When runs do overlap, offset
and alternate the run markers as shown in the log examples at the end of
each chapter for service descriptions. Where resistivities plot below 0.2
ohm-m (i.e., plots into the depth track), offset run markers if necessary to
avoid overlap between the run marker and resistivity trace.
Make note that run markers should now be plotted on the right side of the
depth track. Data density has been moved to the left-hand side of the depth
track so it will not interfere with resistivity traces that plot below 0.2
ohm-m.

2-10

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Log Preparation

TD Markers
TD markers should also be provided at the end of the log (at TD) in the
depth track unless they overlap with depth labels (see log examples at the
end of each chapter for service descriptions). Commonly, this will happen
on only one log, such as the TVD log. In this case, remove the marker from
the log in question but include it on all other logs where it does not overlap.
TD markers can also be generated manually using the Line Annotation
option for comment.fil (see page 2-16).
Sliding Indicator
This is a new option that permits identification of sliding intervals on the
log. As a default, plot the line between the specified depth interval on the
outside edge of the right side of the log (i.e., track 3).

Comment Files
Note: In order to activate all or any of the annotation options in
comment.fil, go to the HPUTIL main menu and select
MPLOT CONFIGURATION. Select Yes for desired
options. It is important to note that comment files are
generated using the SEE ASCII editor (selected from the
HPUTIL main menu). Comment files are edited using
either the SEE editor or the edit option in the MPLOT log
plotting configuration menu (press [F1] to edit). To
facilitate editing and log preparation, all features such as
trace labels and annotations etc. can be viewed directly
on the screen logs (press [F8] to view log).
Remarks
Type in your remarks as they should appear on the remarks page. If you do
not want a remark printed, you must either delete it or insert an
exclamation mark in front of the remark. The exclamation mark, when
placed in column 1, basically tells the computer not to print that line (see
Exclamation Mark on page 2-12).
Annotations
You should make an attempt to learn all of the annotation options available
under the comment.fil. Become familiar with freeforming the annotations
and, in particular, the Down from Depth and Down to Depth options.
These allow you to freeform run markers in the event that you have
overlapping runs. You will also be required to annotate the casing size in
the depth track of each log where applicable (see example logs at the end of
each chapter for service descriptions). You may also find it necessary to
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

2-11
Confidential

Log Preparation

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

freeform the See Remark X option when the preset positions get in the
way of log traces.
Look for areas of conflict after plotting a log. For example, look for
overlapping run markers, casing markers and TD markers that overlap
depth markers, or trace labels and See Remark X that overlap traces, etc.
If there are conflicts, reposition the label accordingly. Overlapping run
markers should be put in the depth track using freeform annotations. Omit
TD markers from logs where the TD marker conflicts with a depth label.
See Remark 1
Make note of the track coding (1 through 4). If none of these positions
works well for your log, use the freeform annotations (see the preceding
section).
Exclamation Mark
Use the ! symbol for any line you do not want to print on the remarks
page. Also use this to fill line spaces between different sections in your
comment.fil. This prevents blank remarks pages from printing below your
last remarks.
Scale Changes
Become familiar with the Scale Change option (see example logs at the
end of each chapter for service descriptions). This has a very important
application for the first track on every log. In the past, we have encountered
conflicts between the gamma ray and the rate of penetration trace. These
conflicts can, in many cases, be eliminated with a scale change. In the
event of high rates of penetration, you should apply a scale change to the
rate of penetration trace through the interval characterized by the high
drilling rates. In many cases, you may find it necessary to apply a scale
change to the gamma ray trace when it drifts off to one side. Use good
judgement for scale changes. Although you should feel comfortable about
making scale changes, do not get in the habit of applying scale changes
every 1,500 feet.
Trace Labels
When setting up trace labels, make sure to set up separate gamma ray trace
labels for the correlation and quantitative logs. Due to the different
smoothing intervals between the two, labels set up for the correlation log
typically will not work for the quantitative log.
Most engineers find it convenient to build a comment.fil for the main
header and each log type (such as 1MD.fil, 1TVD.fil, 5MD.fil, 5TVD.fil,
comment.fil). It is recommended to end each file with the three letter
extension .fil. This ensures that all of these files will be stored when a
2-12

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Log Preparation

Getdata is performed. Also make sure to use a name that makes it easy to
understand which file is for which log. Remember, we need to have the
capability to plot your log in the event you cannot. If any corrections are
made to your comment files while you are plotting final logs, make sure to
restore these to disk via a Getdata.
Traces On/Off
This is a new function in MPLOT that enables the engineer to turn traces
on or off where desired. This is advantageous, for example, when you log
behind casing. Your log response is rather erratic and may drift beyond the
track it is plotted in. This data can be turned off without having to
manipulate the database. The same can be done in areas with poor data
quality due to a tool failure. Its most common use is when combining realtime and memory data. Typically, the real-time data is disabled in the
overlap region where the real-time data ends and the memory data begins
or vice versa. (see Traces On and Off on page 2-15 for instructions on
how to use this option.)

Guide to Comment.fil (Bryan Dugas)


Comment.fil
Comment.fil contains commands and text to be displayed on logs
generated with MPLOT. It is important to note that the comment file is
generated using the SEE editor (selected from the HPUTIL main menu).
The comment file can be edited using either the SEE editor or the edit
option in the MPLOT log plotting configuration menu (press [F1] to edit).
To facilitate editing, all features such trace labels, annotations, etc., can be
viewed directly on the screen logs (press [F8] to view log).
Each line in the comment.fil is classified by the first character (which
should always be left justified). Also note that there are no spaces in
between characters. Below is a summary of the formats of the different
types of annotations:
#LABEL,DEPTH,VALUE,LEFT OR RIGHT

: Trace Labels

!COMMENT

: Do Not Print

@X,DEPTH,TRACK #

: See Remark X

^LABEL,DEPTH,CYCLES,LEDGE,REDGE

: Scale Change

%ANNOTATION,DEPTH,LOCATION

: ASCII Across

*ANNOTATION,DEPTH,LOCATION

: ASCII Down To

&ANNOTATION,DEPTH,LOCATION

: ASCII Down From

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

2-13
Confidential

Log Preparation

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

+LABEL,DEPTH

: Trace On

-LABEL,DEPTH

: Trace Off

|START DEPTH,END DEPTH,LOCATION,WIDTH

: Line Annotation

Any Other Character

: Remark On Header

See Remarks X
@X,DEPTH,TRACK #

@1,12000,1
@2,12500,4

(example 1)
(example 2)

Example 1: Place See Remark 1 at 12000 MD in the first track.


Example 2: Place See Remark 2 at 12500 MD in between tracks 2 & 3.
TRACK # coding
1 = TRACK 1
2 = TRACK 2
3 = TRACK 3
4 = Between tracks 2 & 3
Comment Line
!This Line Will Not Print.

Trace Labels
#LABEL,DEPTH,VALUE,LEFT OR RIGHT

#GRCM,12000,160,R (example 1)
#GRCM,12500,160,L (example 2)
Example 1: Place GRCM label at 12000 MD to the right of the trace at a
value of 160.
Example 2: Place GRCM label at 12500 MD to the left of the trace at a
value of 160.
An arrow automatically accompanies each trace label.
For L the trace label looks like GRCM->.
For R the trace label looks like <-GRCM.
See Mnemonics Listing in Appendix A for a listing of trace labels.

2-14

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Log Preparation

Traces On and Off


+/-LABEL,DEPTH

-GRCM,12000 (example 1)
+GRCM,12100 (example 2)
Example 1: The GRCM trace is turned off at 12000 MD (the trace is no
longer plotted on the log).
Example 2: The GRCM trace is turned on at 12100 MD (the trace begins
plotting at the above depth).
Note: A valid range must exist for the <curve> when the log
begins plotting in order for the + and - commands to
work. The screen log does not support this feature.
Scale Change
LABEL,DEPTH,CYCLES,LEDGE,REDGE

^GRCM,12000,0,25,250 (example 1)
^RSAX,12500,2,.2,20
(example 2)
Example 1: Change scale of GRCM at 12000 MD with 0 cycles (Linear
Grid) and a scale from 25 to 250.
Example 2: Change scale of RSAX at 12500 MD with 2 cycles
(Logarithmic Grid) and a scale from 0.2 to 20.
Annotations Across
%ANNOTATION,DEPTH,LOCATION

%10 3/4,12500,540
(example 1)
%CASING,12000,540 (example 2)
Example 1: Place 10 3/4 at 12500 MD at location 540 (Depth Track).
Example 2: Place CASING at 12000 MD at location 540 (Depth Track).

LOCATION CODING
TRACK 1
28

280

Depth

TRACK 2

540 690
660

940

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

TRACK 3
1200

1450

1700

2-15
Confidential

Log Preparation

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Annotation Down From Depth


&ANNOTATION,DEPTH,LOCATION

&> Run 6,12000,660 (example 1)


&> Run 5,11000,660 (example 2)
Example 1: Place > Run 6 starting at 12000 MD at location 660 (Depth
Track).
Example 2: Place > Run 5 starting at 11000 MD at location 660 (Depth
Track).
Annotation Down To Depth
*ANNOTATION,DEPTH,LOCATION

*Run 6 <,13000,660 (example 1)


*Run 5 <,12000,660 (example 2)
Example 1: Place Run 6 < ending at 13000 MD at location 660 (Depth
Track).
Example 2: Place Run 5 < ending at 12000 MD at location 660 (Depth
Track).
Line Annotation
|<START DEPTH>,<END DEPTH>, <LOCATION>,<WIDTH>

This line command draws a line between the <Start Depth> and <End
Depth> at the location of a given width. The width is represented in
1/200th of an inch (for example, 2 is 2/200th of an inch). This command
is used to manually generate casing markers, TD markers, and sliding
indicators.
|11000,11050,1701,8

Example: A vertical line is drawn on the outside edge of the track 3 from
11,000 to 11,050 feet with a line thickness of 8/200ths of an inch. 8 is a
typical line thickness for a sliding bar indicator. 2 is typical for
standard width lines.

2-16

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Log Preparation

Horizontal Lines
|START DEPTH,END DEPTH,LOCATION,WIDTH

Horizontal lines can also be drawn by manipulating the start and end depth
and width. In this case, start and end depth represent the line thickness and
width is line length.
|9000,9000.2,540,153

Example: The TD marker is placed in the depth track at 9,000 feet. The
length of the line begins at the location of 540 and extends for 153/200ths
of an inch. Line thickness is 0.2 (log) feet.
Casing Markers
%?,DEPTH-0.5,537
%,DEPTH-0.5,671

Casing markers can be created individually by using a combination of


Annotation Across (%) and a line command (|). The depth listed should be
the casing depth minus 0.5. Two special characters (?, Alt 22...for the left
side) and (, Alt-23...for the right side) are needed for plotting the casing
markers. These ASCII characters are created in the text editor by holding
down [ALT] and typing the number on the numeric keypad, then releasing
[ALT]. As can be seen, this annotation takes two comments, one for each
side of the depth track. Additionally, a line annotation is needed to draw a
line across the depth track. Note the example below:
%?,9000.5,537
%,9000.5,671
|9001,9001.2,537,153

Example: A casing marker is placed on each side of the depth track


(location 537 and 671) at a depth of 9,000.5 feet. A horizontal line is also
drawn across the depth track at 9,001 feet.
Note: Examples in Line Annotation, Horizontal Lines, and
Casing Markers are based on a 5-inch log
presentation, the values for line width or thickness will
vary depending on depth scales used for plotting.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

2-17
Confidential

Log Preparation

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Gulton Plotter Calibration


Manual Calibration
Prior to plotting final logs, the Gulton plotter must be checked for
calibration (see Gulton Wellogger in Appendix B). Run a calibration
strip and check the Gulton for accuracy. If it falls out of the specification,
recalibrate and run another calibration strip. Check for accuracy again. At
this point, you are ready to plot final logs. The 20-inch strip should
measure out to +/- 1/16th of an inch.
However, to effectively provide quality control for calibrations, the
20-inch calibration strip from the calibrated Gulton should precede the
header on every final log you intend to plot. In other words, prior to
plotting a final header and log, run a 20-inch calibration strip. Advance the
paper a small amount and begin plotting your header. Do not separate the
calibration strip from the log (i.e., this is insurance that the Gulton plotter
calibrated is the same plotter used to plot your logs). Anytime a different
plotter is used, the log must be accompanied by a calibration strip as
requested above.
Software Calibration
Software calibration is selected from the HPUTIL main menu (see Gulton
Wellogger in Appendix B). This executable program was developed by
Bryan Dugas as an alternative to the manual calibration. It should be more
reliable than the manual calibration. Use the same quality control
procedures outlined in the preceding section.

2-18

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Chapter

Headers
This chapter explains how to generate the miniheader and
the full header.

Miniheader
Miniheaders should be reserved for logs generated on the rigsite for
morning and afternoon reports. These headers will not be used for final
field prints at the end of a job. Follow the same format as the main header
for header presentation. Make sure to note any scale changes that might
occur from day to day in the Remarks section.
In addition to remarks, it is required that you provide on the miniheader the
following:

Sensor distance to bit for each sensor.

Mud type and most recently recorded mud weight.

Mud chlorides.

Rm , Rmf at BHCT (F for North and South America, C for


International). See Main Header, Environmental Parameters on
page 3-8 for details of these measurements.

Measured depth and TVD of BHCT.

P-SERIES currently does not have the capability to plot a Remarks page
for the miniheader. In this case, after the miniheader is plotted, advance the
plotting paper forward to permit space for handwriting remarks. After
enough paper has been advanced, continue plotting the log.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

3-1
Confidential

Headers

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Full Header
Main Header Page, Top Half
Note: When using HPUTIL plotting packages (HEAD/
MPLOT), carefully inspect the information on your
headers. There are character string restrictions which
tend to chop off the end of words in customer
information, permanent datum, elevations, and rig name
when data are copied over from the M-SERIES Job Data
disk.
Service Type
Service type is plotted adjacent to the company logo in the box at the top of
the header. Only the services (or log traces) presented on the log should
appear in this box. For example, if a triple combo service was run but only
DPR data was plotted on the log, then the box should read Dual
Propagation Resistivity, Gamma Ray. Any other service that was run but
not presented on the log should appear in the Other Services box, in this
case Neutron Porosity, Density, and Directional Surveys (note that
Directional no longer appears in the Service Type box as a default!).
Additionally, there is adequate space to record the hole size or hole section,
a common request for international clients who prefer final log distribution
for each hole section, as opposed to composite logs for the entire well.
Customer Information
It is very important that the correct customer information be on the final
log header. Although you should have reasonable confidence in the
information given on the master job sheet, mistakes are common. It is
encouraged that you to double and triple check your well information by
cross referencing with other sources on the rig. Areas to check are the
directional driller's well plot, the mud report, and the IADC report. Give
little faith in a sign on the company man's wall with the well information
on it or signs on the derrick of the rig. These are seldom updated from well
to well, especially for operators who tend to go from well to well very
quickly.
Well Numbers
Well numbers may be designated as either No. A-34 or # A-34.

3-2

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Headers

Field
The bottom-hole location block number should always be provided here.
In other words, if the rig is located in block 60, but the bottom-hole
location is block 59, use block 59 here. Avoid abbreviations unless a
character string overflow exists, which is a common problem here.
County
Once again avoid abbreviations. If the field is offshore, write
OFFSHORE.
Country
Country can be abbreviated due to character string restrictions.
Well Location
Always use the surface location coordinates. Make sure to identify clearly
these coordinates as Surface Location. Double and triple check the block
numbers to avoid confusion between surface and bottom-hole locations
(this is a common problem!). Well location coordinates can always be
found in the well prognosis, which the company man should have. Final
logs without well locations will not be accepted. If well locations are not
available on the rig site, then call the office. The marketing representative
responsible for the account will be contacted.
North America
Lease line coordinates (such as 1250' FEL, 1100' FSL of South Pass Block
65) are typically preferred by the customer. If lease line coordinates are not
available, then Lambert coordinates (more commonly referred to as X,Y
coordinates) can be used. If lease line coordinates or Lambert coordinates
are not available, then latitude and longitude, which is a universal
coordinate system, should be used. Format this as follows:
00deg 00min 00sec North
00deg 00min 00sec East

International
International typically uses longitude and latitude. See the above format for
this. Additionally, there is a specific UTM format as follows:
UTM Zone 00

UTM Zone 00

0 000 000.00m North

0 000 000.00ft North

0 000 000.00m East

0 000 000.00ft East

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

3-3
Confidential

Headers

Log Quality and Data Management Standards


If the location is related to any other position, such as a platform center, use
the oil company format and make note in the Well Location stating this
(e.g., Ref to Platform Center).

Sect./Twp./Range
This is a terrestrial coordinate system used primarily in the United States.
Lease line coordinates that are used for a land or onshore location should
be accompanied by this. If this information is not provided at the rigsite,
call the office.
API Number
American Petroleum Institute number is used as a well reference number
for wells drilled in the United States. Although not required in the past, it is
quickly becoming a standard part of the log header among many
companies. If they do not have this information on location, call the office.
Other Services
This space is designated to list other measurements or services used but not
provided on the log. In the past, we used this to designate things such as
pore pressure detection, etc. If you notice the header pic.fil has been
changed, directional has been omitted from the header. Therefore,
Directional Surveys should be included in the other services box.
When triple combo logs are generated, the modular neutron porosity and
modular density lithology traces are typically excluded from the
correlation log presentation but provided on the quantitative log
presentation. Therefore, when plotting the correlation log for these
services, Modular Neutron Porosity and/or Modular Density Lithology
should be listed in the other services box.
Drilling Information
Log is measured from R.K.B. (Rotary Kelly Bushing) unless a top drive is
used, then log is measured from D.F. (drill floor). This should be followed
by elevation above permanent datum (this value should match the values in
the Elevation box).
Example: Log measured from R.K.B., 92 ft Above Perm. Datum.
Elevation KB 92 ft.
Permanent Datum will have to be abbreviated as M.S.L. for mean sea
level and G.L. for ground level (land locations). All numbers that represent
depths should be followed by abbreviated units (for example: 8080 ft).
All dates should be expressed as DD MMM YY. Make sure your depth
in on the header is the depth at which Formation Evaluation Logging
Services begin, not where Directional Services begin.
3-4

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Headers

Elevation Information
Elev. KB is the elevation of the kelly bushing above the permanent
datum (i.e., if you are offshore, the permanent datum would be mean sea
level). However, in some areas, this number represents the elevation of the
kelly bushing above the sea bed (i.e., the number is the summation of water
depth and the elevation of the kelly bushing above mean sea level). The
Elev. KB is always listed as one foot higher than Elev. DF (elevation of the
drill floor). Both of these are displayed as positive numbers. If you are
drilling with a top drive unit, you will reference your depth from the drill
floor; therefore list Elev. KB as N/A.
Water depth/GL is the water depth (offshore) or elevation of ground
level above sea level (onshore) at the rigsite. If you are on a land job, it is
very important that you obtain the ground elevation at the rigsite. If it is
not available at the rigsite, call either the geologist or engineer watching
the well. If they are not available, call the office. The Marketing Rep or
Technical Rep will be contacted and requested to obtain the information.
Both of these numbers are usually listed as positive numbers, although
local variations may exist. Consult company geologists for guidance if it is
unclear how to represent the elevation information.
Note: This information must be accurate. It is used by
geologists to compensate for differences in depth between
logs. These differences occur when wells are logged on
rigs with different air gaps and water depths. Knowing
the elevation of the kelly bushing and the correct water
depth allows geologists to reference all logs to a
permanent datum. This is essential for accurate depth
correlation between logs.

Main Header Page, Bottom Half


Borehole Record
All borehole size numbers are expressed in inches (in.) and all depths
expressed as abbreviated units (for example: 8080 ft). Avoid expressing
inches in decimal form (such as 10.75 in.). The conventional method is
preferred (such as 10-3/4 in.). Always begin your borehole record from the
first hole section.
Casing Record
All casing size numbers are expressed in inches (in.) and all depths
expressed as abbreviated units (for example: 8080 ft). As with Borehole
Record, avoid expressing inches in decimal form. Additionally, begin the
casing record from the first hole section; typically this would be drive pipe.
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

3-5
Confidential

Headers

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Drilling Contractor/Rig
Avoid abbreviating the name of the drilling contractor or the rig whenever
possible. However, there are character string restrictions in Rig so list
only the rig name or number. For example, instead of Zapata Yorktown,
list it as Yorktown.
Log Type/Scale
The Make Log configuration menu in HPUTIL gives you the capability to
manually modify some options such as log scale (e.g., modify 1:1200 to
read 1 IN = 100 FT). Use the default setting unless otherwise requested by
the client.
Print Type
Options are field or final print. Any log prints left on location at the end of
a job should have field print headers. Any logs that are intended to be
distributed to the customer from the office at the completion of a job will
have final print headers. However, any final logs distributed to the
customer without the proper quality assurance checks will have field print
headers. Final field prints should never be made with miniheaders.
Company Representative/Teleco Representative
It is recommended that both first and last names be listed. Where
appropriate, first initials may be substituted for the first name. Likewise,
first initials or first name may be preceded by Mr. Most importantly,
make sure the spelling of company personnel is correct.
Job Number
Double check to make sure that the correct job number is represented.

Main Header, Bit Run Summary


Always make sure that bit numbers are accurately listed. Bit numbers are
easily found on the IADC report in the company man or tool pushers
office. List rerun bits with the number of the bit followed by RR (i.e.,
8RR).
Surface Gear
Do not use Teleco run codes (such as MCC or MCB) to list surface gear.
Surface gear should be listed as TR-3201 or TR 2306.

3-6

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Headers

Eastman Teleco OD/Type


Because of a lack of space, inches must be expressed using a quotation
mark ( ) instead of the conventional (in.). Avoid expressing inches in
decimal form (such as 7.75 in.); use the conventional method (7-3/4). Use
the standard Teleco three-letter abbreviation for tool type (such as RGD).
Run Data
All depths should be expressed as abbreviated units (for example: 8080 ft).
Use conventional standards to express bit diameter as inches (such as
9-7/8 in.). Log times should be expressed as hh:mm (such as 05:30 hrs).
Always follow up time numerics with hrs. Dates should be expressed as
DD MMM YY (14 FEB 92). Measured Depth In/Out is bit depth. Top/
Bottom Interval Logged should be the depth of the F.E. sensor, which is
closest to the bit. For example, in a standard triple combo configuration,
this will be the DPR sensor.
Mud Data
Because of a lack of space, mud type will have to be abbreviated such as
lignosulfonate (Ligno) or polymer (Poly). Chloride counts should always
be followed by abbreviated units (e.g., parts per million abbreviated
ppm). Eventually this will be moved to the Environmental Parameters
page.
Water Loss
Water loss and mud filtrate are synonymous. Mud filtrate can be found on
the mud report. The units for water loss are cc/30min, which can be
abbreviated as cc. Eventually this will be moved to the Environmental
Parameters page.
Rm @ Temp
List surface recorded mud resistivities and temperatures. Most customers
prefer to make there own environmental corrections. Providing the
customer with mud resistivities that have already been corrected for depth
does not permit this option. See Main Header, Environmental Parameters
on page 3-8 on the method for collecting and measuring mud data.
Company Representative/Eastman Teleco Field Engineer
List the company representative and Teleco field engineer who was on
location during the course of that particular run. There is not much space
provided for this information, so first initials may be necessary. There is
enough room for one engineer's name. Therefore, it has been left optional
to the engineers on location to alternate their names with each run. If the
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

3-7
Confidential

Headers

Log Quality and Data Management Standards


last names of both engineers are short, you may be able to list both for each
run (such as Jones/Smith).

Main Header, Equipment


Equipment Serial Numbers
Record individual serial numbers for each sub, source, detector, etc. Drill
Collar Number is redundant with Eastman Teleco DHA No. in the Bit
Run Summary (this will be removed in later versions of software).
Modular Assembly No. should begin with 1 for the first Modular
Assembly used and incremented sequentially only when the modular
assembly changes between runs. For example, one modular assembly was
used for three runs (no changes in the assembly were made in between
runs). The number 1 should appear in the columns for the first three runs.
However, prior to running in the hole for run number four, the neutron sub
was exchanged. Then a 2 should appear in the column for run number
four. These numbers will correspond to modular tool diagrams that will be
plotted out on the header (this capability is scheduled for a later P-SERIES
release).
Sensor Offsets to Bit/Memory Acquisition Rates
Sensor offset is the distance of the sensor to the bit. Additionally, place
memory acquisition rates for sensors here. Remember, the MDL and MNP
acquisition rates are not the same as DPR.
Other Tool Information
Disregard Total Weight and Stab/Location. Fill in with N/A.

Main Header, Environmental Parameters


Rm and Rmf should be recorded at least twice a day, or anytime mud weight,
potassium content, or chloride content of the mud system changes. This
can become significant when drilling into salt or changing a mud system
over from fresh to salt saturated. These data should be documented on the
miniheaders of daily logs (see Miniheader on page 3-1) as well as the full
header for final logs.
Note: Rm and Rmf should always be recorded from a meter. Do
not calculate these from mud chlorides. This may result
in inconsistent results. Once the surface measurement
has been made, correct Rm and Rmf for the bottom hole
circulating temperature (CDS temperature) using Arp's
equation. Present these parameters on the Environmental
Parameters page as Rm and Rmf @ BHCT (bottom hole
3-8

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Headers

circulating temperature). Also record the measured depth


of the BHCT. In order to guarantee consistency in your
measurement of Rm , it is recommended to allow the mud
sample to cool to surface temperature (i.e., room
temperature, typically 75 to 80F) before measuring the
mud resistivity. The mud filtrate should be easily
collected from the mud engineer on location.
It is important that both measurements ( Rm and Rmf ) be taken from mud
that has been collected from the same location. By convention, mud
samples for these measurements should be collected from the flowline.
However, your mud sample should be consistent with where the mud
engineer (who is providing you with filtrate samples) collects his sample.
Check with the mud engineer for his collection point. If he is sampling only
from the active pit, then take your samples from the active pit. If he is
sampling from both the active pit and the flowline, request filtrate from the
flowline.
Once you have established a sample location, maintain that same location
for the duration of the job. The key is consistency!

Main Header, Calibration Verification


Note: See P-SERIES 2.0 Operators Guide, Chapter 10,
Displays/Reports/Logs
DPR
Calibration verification data is captured in the P-SERIES database and
automatically displayed in the Calibration Verification page from the
Displays/Reports/Logs menu. Select Calibration Verification, then press
[F9] for Getdata.
Gamma Ray
Calibration verification data is captured in the P-SERIES database and
automatically displayed in the Calibration Verification page from the
Displays/Reports/Logs menu. Select Calibration Verification, then press
[F9] for Getdata.
Neutron Porosity
Calibration verification data is captured in the P-SERIES database and
automatically displayed in the Calibration Verification page from the
Displays/Reports/Logs menu. Select Calibration Verification, then press
[F9] for Getdata.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

3-9
Confidential

Headers

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Density
Calibration verification data is captured in the P-SERIES database and
automatically displayed in the Calibration Verification page from the
Displays/Reports/Logs menu. Select Calibration Verification, then press
[F9] for Getdata.

Main Header, Remarks


Mnemonics
At the top of the remarks page should be a listing of the mnemonics used
on the log. See Appendix A for an updated listing of the mnemonics for
M-SERIES 1.33 and P-SERIES 2.01. Use the mnemonics definitions
provided in Appendix A for the mnemonics listing on the Remarks page.
Remarks
The objective of the remarks page is to document as clearly as possible any
events that might affect the measurement of our sensors. We want to
ensure, in our documentation, that we eliminate ambiguities, not add to
them. Therefore, take time to organize your remarks. (It becomes obvious
when you do not!) Please make note of the example header formats. You
should attempt to follow these as accurately as possible.
List only those remarks that are relevant to the log. For example, it is not
necessary to list the number of Directional Only runs prior to logging runs.
Also provide a space in between each remark for easier reading.
Remarks should be numerically listed and referenced on the log with a
See Remark, etc. Organize the remarks so they are listed sequentially
with depth. In other words, remark number 3 should not reference a depth
that is shallower than remark number 2.
Your documentation should be written for the geologist or petrophysicist
who will be analyzing this data six months from now and may not be
familiar with the drilling operations that took place on the rig. So be
concise and avoid using rig slang during documentation. For example,
instead of saying the hole was backlogged or backreamed on the way in the
hole, write: The interval from 2020 to 2040 ft was logged while reaming
during the trip in the hole for run No. 1. Bottom drilling and logging began
at 2040 ft. This clarifies when, where, and what events took place.

Include both measured depth and TVD depths when referencing


specific depth intervals. List measured depths first, followed by TVD
depths in parentheses. For example, 8400 to 8900 ft MD (7200 to
7600 ft TVD).

3-10

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Headers

Items that should be documented in the Remarks page * are as


follows:
1.

Casing depth of driller / casing depth of logger: Traditionally,


there is almost always a discrepancy between the driller's casing
depth and an open hole loggers casing depth. Always record the
drillers casing depth and below it indicate where Teleco logged
out of casing. Additionally, always place casing labels at the
depth where Teleco logged out of casing, not the drillers casing
depth. This means you must enter the depth where Teleco logs
out of casing under casing data on the main header page. This is
the depth MPLOT uses to place casing labels on the log.

2.

Sections of hole that were logged behind casing.

3.

Sections of rat hole not logged on run prior to running casing


due to sensor offset.

4.

Sections of hole that were reamed. Reaming for logs is


becoming more common, especially with the Modular Services.
Be careful to document and differentiate reaming runs from runs
made while drilling ahead. Also define the objective for the ream
(e.g., the reaming run recovered data lost on a prior run due to a
tool failure or whether it represents second pass data for time
lapse logging).

5.

Real-time log versus memory log (when a standard MWD


Service such as RGD is mixed or merged with RWD Services or
when an MWD log from an RWD Service is merged with an
RWD log).

6.

Exposure time. The Time Since Drilled trace does not wrap.
Therefore, provide a remark where the trace goes off scale that
indicates how much exposure time there was in that interval prior
to logging (e.g., the interval from 3030 to 3080 ft was logged 13
hrs after drilled).

7.

Editing.

8.

High penetration rates, which tend to reduce data density or


may even leave gaps in the log.

9.

Surface equipment problems (such as power failures). This is


important because it clarifies the reason for low data densities or
no data density in areas with low rates of penetration.

10.

Decoding problems. This is important for the same reasons


listed above in surface equipment problems.

11.

Salt.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

3-11
Confidential

Headers

Log Quality and Data Management Standards


12.

High chlorides in the circulating mud that might support


evidence of drilling salt should also be documented. This should
be additionally documented in the Environmental Parameters
page with recorded Rm , Rmf , @ BHCT (see Main Header,
Environmental Parameters on page 3-8 for more details of these
measurements).

13.

Any unexplained or anomalous readings. Notify the office


first of any occurrences. What may be anomalous to you may be
routine for someone with formation evaluation expertise.

14.

Lost circulation.

15.

Tool failures and the depths at which they occurred should be


documented in the Remarks page.

3-12

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Chapter

Directional/Natural Gamma Ray


This chapter provides instructions on gathering and
processing measurements for Directional/Natural Gamma
Ray Service. Log presentations are included at the back of
the chapter.

Introduction
Although the popularity of Directional/Natural Gamma Ray Service has
diminished in recent years, it is still useful as an inexpensive lithology
indicator. In fact, this service has been used repeatedly for logging and
surveying horizontal wells in the Bakken Formation of South Dakota and
Montana. The tool consists of a directional collar coupled with a geigermueller or scintillator gamma detector. This service has only realtime data
acquisition capabilities, thus it is heavily dependent on drilling rates for
adequate data densities. Although this service does have the capability to
store data in the MTC memory, there are no plans to offer a commercial
rigsite memory service with this tool. The DG tool can be used in any mud
type, although consideration must be given to any KCL or KOH present in
the mud.

Mud Types
All mud systems.

Borehole Correction Inputs - Gamma Ray


Tool size, hole size, mud weight, %K (potassium content), sensor type,
gamma API correction factor.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

4-1
Confidential

Directional/Natural Gamma Ray Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Data Editing
Editing of Realtime Data
Because of occasional decoding problems that can introduce bad data into
the database, it is necessary to edit periodically. Editing should be prudent.
Obvious bad data should be removed from the database. Under no
circumstances should the data be replaced or altered. However, it is
preferred that questionable data remain in the database. This data should be
identified and referenced on the log with a remark.
Depth Shifts
Make sure logging depths are as accurate as possible. Make depth shifts in
the database where necessary. Anytime depths differ at a depth at kelly
down by 1.0 foot (0.45 meters) or greater, a depth shift should be
performed. Depth shifts can be minimized by frequently calibrating the
Kelly Height sensor at kelly down and updating the depth at kelly down at
every connection.

Data Management
M-SERIES
A raw database file should be stored on the hard disk (Winchester) and an
edited database file backed up on disk. If a Winchester is not used on the
rigsite, a raw database file also should be backed up to disk. Provide all
necessary information on every disk label, and use an easy to follow
sequential numbering scheme for labeling disks.
P-SERIES
The database file should be backed up to tape periodically during the job.
Both edited and raw data are maintained in the same database, so there is
no distinction between the two like M-SERIES.
HPUTIL
When M-SERIES (MWD data) or P-SERIES XFER files (MWD data) are
converted to binary files for plotting with MPLOT, then several file types
should be backed up to disk. These are as follows:

binary.* (includes .fil, .apd, .uni, .idx),

*.cfg (HPUTIL Rev. 2.1 or greater)

setup.fil (Mplot/Wplot formats...formally newplot.fil)

log.fil (Makelog/Head/Minihead formats)

4-2

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards Directional/Natural Gamma Ray

tvddata.fil

newplot.fil (use with HPUTIL versions earlier than Rev. 2.1)

header.fil (use with HPUTIL versions earlier than Rev. 2.1)

comment.fil

Rigsite Data Processing


Smoothing and/or Averaging
M-SERIES
None applied to the database. User selective smoothing or averaging can be
applied when plotting (see log formats for recommended curve
smoothing).
P-SERIES
None applied to the realtime database. User selective smoothing or
averaging can be applied when plotting (see log formats for recommended
curve smoothing).
HPUTIL
If Squeeze is applied to the binary.fil, backplots are removed and data is
averaged on a 0.25 feet (0.10 meter) interval. User selective smoothing can
also be applied when plotting (see log formats for recommended curve
smoothing).

Filtering
None.

Other
Borehole Corrections
Automatically applied by the surface software (see Borehole Correction
Inputs on page 6-2).
Squeeze
Squeeze is required for non-P-SERIES databases (HPUTIL binary files).
Apply to binary files before plotting final logs with Gulton plotters.
Squeeze compresses data file by removing all backplots and then averages
the data on a 0.25 feet (0.10 meter) interval. (For more information, see
Squeeze on page 1-5.)
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

4-3
Confidential

Directional/Natural Gamma Ray Log Quality and Data Management Standards


Quicken
Quicken is not required but highly recommended for non-P-SERIES
databases (HPUTIL binary files). Apply to binary files after Squeeze is
performed. This application sets up indices for every 100 feet (50 meters)
of log, which speeds up the depth search routine for the MEDIT editor.
(For more information, see Quicken on page 1-5).
ADDTSD
ADDTSD is required for non-P-SERIES databases (HPUTIL binary files).
Apply to binary file as needed during job. This application calculates the
time since drilled and data density curves for MWD and RWD data.
Calculate from the gamma ray (GRAX) unless otherwise requested. (For
more information, see page 2-7.)
ADDTSD is required on every horizontal well. This routine calculates and
arranges directional data (true vertical depth) so it can be plotted as a curve.
This is an HPUTIL utility program. (For more information, see True
Vertical Depth on page 2-8.)
Note: No other rigsite data processing is required unless
incorrect borehole corrections have been entered into the
database. If this occurs, enter the correct correction
factors and recalculate the database.

Postwell Data Processing


Before Final Logs
None.

After Final Logs - LIS ASCII File and Tape


Performed using WDS, LOGWORKS, or P-SERIES.

Rigsite Calibration Verification


Currently, none is required.

4-4

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards Directional/Natural Gamma Ray

Quality Control
Quality Control Curves
Data Density
Data density (integrated) should be calculated from the gamma ray (GRIX)
and plotted on quantitative logs as tick marks in the depth track on the lefthand side.
Time Since Drilled
Time since drilled (GRTX) should be plotted on the quantitative log in
track II with rate of penetration. The line type should be a medium spot.

Log Quality Control


You are responsible as a logging engineer to periodically evaluate the data
quality of your logs. Generate quantitative logs and inspect the curves for
areas that might suggest a compromise in quality. If areas characterized by
poor quality are detected, notify the office (Teleco) and the client
immediately. Under these circumstances, the client should be given the
opportunity to recover either lost or poorly recorded data.

Typical Log Response


The gamma ray sensor is primarily a lithology indicator. It measures the
natural gamma ray radiation that is emitted from naturally occurring
radioactive elements (uranium, thorium, and potassium) deposited within
the surrounding formations. As it turns out, shale generally contains much
higher quantities of these radioactive substances than sandstones and
carbonates (limestone and dolomite). Therefore, the gamma ray sensor can
easily distinguish between shales and non-shale formations in most cases.

Shales are generally identified by high gamma ray readings


(greater than 100 MWD-API units).

Non-shale formations (sandstones and carbonates) are identified


by relatively low gamma ray readings (lower than 60 MWD-API
units).

Other Requirements for This Service


None.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

4-5
Confidential

Directional/Natural Gamma Ray Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Log Presentation
North and South America Log Presentations
1:600 AND 1:1200 ENGLISH DEFAULT LOG FORMATS (correlation)
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

1
2
3
4
5

1
1
2
3
3

GRAX
TVD1
ROPS
WBCS
TCDX2

0
VAR
1000
0
VAR

150
IABLE
0
60
IABLE

MLIN
HSPT
5LIN
MLIN
MSPT

WRAP
NB
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP

Smooth

Pen Up

3
0
0
0
0

10
100
10
10
100

Notes
Optional

1:240 ENGLISH DEFAULT LOG FORMAT (quantitative)


Track 1: Linear

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

1
1
LHDD
2
2
3
3

GRAX
TVD1
GRIX3
ROPS
GRTX
WBCS
TCDX2

0
VAR
**
1000
0
0
VAR

150
IABLE
**
0
300
60
IABLE

MLIN
HSPT
**
2LIN
MSPT
MLIN
MSPT

WRAP
NB
**
WRAP
NB
WRAP
WRAP

1.

Smooth
0.5
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
100
10
10
10
10
100

Notes
Optional

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale should
increase from right to left.

2.

TCDX: Scale should increase from left to right.

3.

GRIX: The output and presentation of this trace is predetermined. However, numbers
must be input into these parameters to prevent MPLOT from crashing. Presentation
is in the depth track.

4-6

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards Directional/Natural Gamma Ray

International Log Presentations


1:500 METRIC DEFAULT LOG FORMAT (correlation)
Track 1: Linear
Trace
1
2
3
4
5

Track
1
1
1
2
3

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

GRAX
TCDX1
TVD2
ROPS3
WBCS4

0
0
VAR
100
0

150
250
IABLE
0
100

MLIN
MSPT
HSPT
5LIN
MLIN

WRAP
WRAP
NB
WRAP
WRAP

0.25
0
0
0
0

10
100
100
10
10

Notes

Optional

1:200 METRIC DEFAULT LOG FORMAT (quantitative)


Track 1: Linear

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

1
1
1
LHDD
2
2
3

GRAX
TCDX1
TVD2
GRIX5
ROPS3
GRTX
WBCS4

0
0
VAR
**
100
600
0

150
250
IABLE
**
0
0
100

MLIN
MSPT
HSPT
**
2LIN
MSPT
MLIN

WRAP
WRAP
NB
**
WRAP
NB
WRAP

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
100
100
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional

1.

TCDX: Default units are Celcius. Other default units and scales are 0-250 F. If
TVD is plotted in track 1, it is recommended to move TCDX to track 3.

2.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale should
increase from right to left.

3.

ROPS: Default units are ft/hr. Other default units and scales are 100 - 0 m/hr, 60 - 0
min/ft, 60 - 0 min/m, 10 - 0 ft/min, 10 - 0 m/min. Default units for averaging is also
feet. Metric equivalent is 2.0 (for 1:500) and 1.0 (for 1:200).

4.

WOBS: Default units are K-lbs. Optional units and scales are 0 - 50 Tonnes, 0 - 500
KN.

5.

GRIX: The output and presentation of this trace is predetermined. However, numbers
must be input into these parameters to prevent MPLOT from crashing. Presentation
is in the depth track.

Note: Pen up intervals are in feet. Metric equivalent is 3 meters


(for 10 feet) and 30 meters (for 100 feet).

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

4-7
Confidential

Directional/Natural Gamma Ray Log Quality and Data Management Standards

4-8

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Chapter

Drilling Dynamics
This chapter provides instructions on gathering and
processing measurements for Drilling Dynamics Service.
Log presentations are included at the back of the chapter.

Introduction
The measurements gathered and plotted for Drilling Dynamics Service are
oriented toward drilling engineering applications. When the downhole
measured parameters, downhole weight on bit, and torque are correlated
and compared to their surface counterparts (surface weight on bit and
rotary torque), drilling efficiency of the bottom-hole assembly can be
monitored. Additional rigsite software packages such as Efficiency While
Drilling (EWD) and the Drilling Assistant are available to the logging
engineer to aid in interpreting trends and anomalies identified on the
realtime log. These measurements are additionally combined with a
scintillator gamma ray detector for lithology identification. This service
currently does not have rigsite memory (RWD) capabilities. However, this
service will soon be retrofitted for Modular Services. Therefore, expect to
see the modular DDG sub more commonly combined with the modular
DPR sub for enhanced RWD logging capabilities.

Mud Types
All mud systems.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

5-1
Confidential

Drilling Dynamics

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Borehole Correction Inputs


Gamma Ray
Tool size, hole size, mud weight, %K (potassium content), sensor type,
gamma API correction factor.
Drilling Dynamics
Drilling dynamics constants C1 and C3 (not actually for a borehole
correction, but these constants are required for calculation of downhole
weight and torque values).

Data Editing
Editing of Realtime Data
Because of occasional decoding problems that can introduce bad data into
the database, it is necessary to edit periodically. Editing should be prudent.
Obvious bad data should be removed from the database. Under no
circumstances should the data be replaced or altered. However, it is
preferred that questionable data remain in the database. This data should be
identified and referenced on the log with a remark. Data spikes recorded in
the downhole torque and weight on bit need to be treated very carefully.
These spikes may be valid measurements. It will take an experienced
engineer to evaluate whether the data is valid or not.
Depth Shifts
Make sure logging depths are as accurate as possible. Make depth shifts in
the database where necessary. Anytime depths differ at a depth at kelly
down by 1.0 foot (0.45 meters) or greater, a depth shift should be
performed. Depth shifts can be minimized by frequently calibrating the
Kelly Height sensor at kelly down and updating the depth at kelly down at
every connection.

Data Management
M-SERIES
A raw database file should be stored on the hard disk (Winchester) and an
edited database file backed up on disk. If a Winchester is not used on the
rigsite, a raw database file also should be backed up to disk. Provide all
necessary information on every disk label and use an easy to follow
sequential numbering scheme for labeling disks.

5-2

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Drilling Dynamics

P-SERIES
The database file should be backed up to tape periodically during the job.
Both edited and raw data are maintained in the same database, so there is
no distinction between the two like M-SERIES.
HPUTIL
When M-SERIES (MWD data) or P-SERIES XFER files (MWD data) are
converted to binary files for plotting with MPLOT, then several file types
should be backed up to disk. These are as follows:

binary.* (includes .fil, .apd, .uni, .idx),

*.cfg (HPUTIL Rev. 2.1 or greater)

setup.fil (Mplot/Wplot formats...formally newplot.fil)

log.fil (Makelog/Head/Minihead formats)

tvddata.fil

newplot.fil (use with HPUTIL versions earlier than Rev. 2.1)

header.fil (use with HPUTIL versions earlier than Rev. 2.1)

comment.fil

Rigsite Data Processing


Smoothing and/or Averaging
WARNING!
Smoothing or averaging applied to the
downhole weight on bit and torque and
surface weight on bit and rotary torque may
mask significant events on the log. It is
recommended that smoothing and/or
averaging be kept to a minimum.
M-SERIES
None applied to the database. User selective smoothing or averaging
applied when plotting (see log formats for recommended curve
smoothing).

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

5-3
Confidential

Drilling Dynamics

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

P-SERIES
None applied to the realtime database. User selective smoothing or
averaging can be applied when plotting (see log formats for recommended
curve smoothing).
HPUTIL
If Squeeze is applied to the binary.fil, data is averaged on a 0.25 feet (0.1
meters) interval. User selective smoothing can be applied when plotting
(see log formats for recommended curve smoothing).

Filtering
None.

Other
Borehole Corrections
Automatically applied to the surface software (see page 5-2).
Squeeze
Squeeze is required for non-P-SERIES databases (HPUTIL binary files).
Apply to binary files before plotting final logs with Gulton plotters.
Squeeze compresses data file by removing all backplots and then averages
the data on a 0.25 feet (0.1 meters) average. (For more information, see
Squeeze on page 1-5.)
Quicken
Quicken is not required but highly recommended for non-P-SERIES
databases (HPUTIL binary files). Apply to binary files after Squeeze is
performed. This application sets up indices for every 100 feet (50 meters)
of log, which speeds up the depth search routine for the MEDIT editor.
(For more information, see Quicken on page 1-5).
ADDTSD
ADDTSD is required for non-P-SERIES databases (HPUTIL binary files).
Apply to binary file as needed during job. This application calculates the
time since drilled and data density curves for MWD and RWD data.
Calculate from the gamma ray (GRAX) unless otherwise requested. (For
more information, see page 2-7.)

5-4

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Drilling Dynamics

ADDTVD
ADDTVD is required on every horizontal well. This routine calculates and
arranges directional data (true vertical depth) so it can be plotted as a curve.
This is an HPUTIL utility program. (For more information, see True
Vertical Depth on page 2-8.)
EWD
Performed as required. EWD is a log enhancement software that identifies
inefficient drilling and calculates drilling porosity and pore pressure.
Note: No other rigsite data processing is required unless
incorrect borehole corrections have been entered into the
database. If this occurs, enter the correct correction
factors and recalculate the database.

Postwell Data Processing


Before Final Logs - EWD
Performed as required. EWD is a log enhancement software package that
identifies inefficient drilling and calculates drilling porosity and pore
pressure.

After Final Logs - LIS ASCII File and Tape


Performed using either WDS, LOGWORKS, or P-SERIES.

Rigsite Calibration Verification


Taring procedures need to be performed on a regular basis to ensure
accurate downhole measured parameters. See DDG Users Manual for
taring procedures.

Log Quality Control


You are responsible as a logging engineer to periodically evaluate the data
quality of your logs. Generate quantitative logs and inspect the curves for
areas that might suggest a compromise in quality. If areas characterized by
poor quality are detected, notify the office (Teleco) and the client
immediately. Under these circumstances the client should be given the
opportunity to recover either lost or poorly recorded data.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

5-5
Confidential

Drilling Dynamics

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Typical Log Responses


Gamma Ray
The gamma ray sensor is primarily a lithology indicator. It measures the
natural gamma ray radiation that is emitted from naturally occurring
radioactive elements (uranium, thorium, potassium) deposited within the
surrounding formations. Shales generally contain higher amounts of these
radioactive substances than sandstones and carbonates (limestone and
dolomite). Therefore, the gamma ray sensor can in most cases, effectively
distinguish between shales and non-shale formations.

Shales are generally identified by high gamma ray readings


(greater than 100 MWD-API units).

Non-shale formations (sandstones and carbonates) are identified


by relatively low gamma ray readings (lower than 60 MWD-API
units)

Drilling Dynamics
The log response of these measurements varies widely depending on
drilling circumstances and are beyond the scope of this manual. Refer to
the DDG Users Manual, Drilling Assistant, and EWD documentation for
interpretation guidelines.

Other Requirements for This Service


None.

5-6

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Drilling Dynamics

Log Presentation
North and South America Log Presentations
1:600 AND 1:1200 ENGLISH DEFAULT LOG FORMATS (correlation)
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
3

GRAX
ROPS
TVD1
TCDX2
INC3
WBCX
WBCS
TQCX
TQCS
RPMS4

0
1000V
AR
VAR
VAR
0
0
0
0
VAR

150
0
IABLE
IABLE
IABLE
60
60
10000
10000
IABLE

MLIN
5DSH
HSPT
MSPT
LSPT
MDSH
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN
LSPT

WRAP
WRAP
NB
WRAP
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
WRAP

3.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
100
100
10
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional
Optional

Optional

1:240 ENGLISH LOG FORMAT


Track 1: Linear

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
3

GRAX
ROPS
TVD1
TCDX2
INC3
WBCX
WBCS
TQCX
TQCS
RPMS4

0
1000V
AR
VAR
VAR
0
0
0
0
VAR

150
0
IABLE
IABLE
IABLE
60
60
10000
10000
IABLE

MLIN
5DSH
HSPT
MSPT
LSPT
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN
MDSH
LSPT

WRAP
WRAP
NB
WRAP
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
WRAP

0.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
100
100
10
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional
Optional

Optional

1.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale should
increase from right to left.

2.

TCDX: Optional trace. Scale should increase from left to right.

3.

INC: Optional trace. Scale should increase from left to right.

4.

RPMS: Optional trace. Scale should increase from left to right.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

5-7
Confidential

Drilling Dynamics

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Plotting Recommendations
Foreground logs configured during the job should use a 2 inch depth scale.
Final logs are presented with a 2 inch and 5 inch scale.
Scales
For surface and true torque, choose trace bounds that allow the downhole
and surface traces to track close together. These are subtle changes
between surface and downhole parameters that can be identified. Although
these trace bounds are typically different, the track divisions must be the
same.
For example: Surface Torque = 5000 to 20000 ft-lbs.
True Torque = 0 to 15000 ft-lbs.....each division for both scales is equal to
1500.
For true and surface weight on bit, trace scales should be the same.
Traces
Always use medium dashed lines for downhole data (true torque and
weight on bit).
See Annotations on page 5-10.

5-8

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Drilling Dynamics

International Log Presentations


1:500 METRIC DEFAULT LOG FORMAT (correlation)
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
3

GRAX
ROPS1
TCDX2
TVD3
INC4
TQCX5
TQCS5
WBCX6
WBCS6
RPMS7

0
100
0
VAR
VAR
0
0
0
0
VAR

150
0
250
VAR
IABLE
10000
10000
100
100
IABLE

MLIN
5DSH
MSPT
HSPT
LSPT
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN
MDSH
LSPT

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
WRAP

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
100
100
10
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional
Optional

Optional

1:200 METRIC LOG FORMAT (quantitative)


Track 1: Linear

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
3

GRAX
ROPS1
TVD2
TCDX3
INC4
TQCX5
TQCS5
WBCX6
WBCS6
RPMS7

0
100
VAR
0
VAR
0
0
0
0
VAR

150
0
IABLE
250
IABLE
10000
10000
100
100
IABLE

MLIN
2DSH
HSPT
MSPT
LSPT
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN
MDSH
LSPT

WRAP
WRAP
NONE
WRAP
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
WRAP

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
100
100
10
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional
Optional

Optional

1. ROPS: Default units are ft/hr. Other default units and scales are 100 - 0 m/hr, 60 - 0 min/ft, 60 - 0
min/m, 10 - 0 ft/min, 10 - 0 m/min. Default for averaging is also feet. Metric equivalent is 2.0 (for
1:500) and 1.0 (for 1:200).
2. TCDX: default units are Celsius. Other default units and scales are 0 - 250F.
3. TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale should increase from
right to left.
4. INC: Optional trace. Scale should increase from left to right.
5. TQCX/TQCS: Default units are ft-lbs. Optional units and scales are 0 - 20000 KN-m.
6. WBCX/WBCS: Default units are K-lbs. Optional units and scales are 0 - 50 Tonnes, 0 - 500 KN.
7. RPMS: Optional trace. Scale should increase from left to right.

Note: Pen up intervals are in feet. Metric equivalent is 3 meters


(for 10 feet) and 30 meters (for 100 feet).
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

5-9
Confidential

Drilling Dynamics

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Plotting Recommendations
Foreground logs configured during the job should use a 2-inch depth scale.
Final logs are presented with a 2-inch and 5-inch scale.
Scales
For surface and true torque, choose trace bounds that allow the downhole
and surface traces to track close together. These are subtle changes
between surface and downhole parameters that can be identified. Although
these trace bounds are typically different, the track divisions must be the
same.
For example: Surface Torque = 5000 to 20000 ft-lbs.
True Torque = 0 to 15000 ftlbs.....each division for both scales is equal to
1500.
For true and surface weight on bit, trace scales should be the same.
Traces
Always use medium dashed lines for downhole data (true torque and
weight on bit).

Annotations

If you are plotting final logs on a replay station with a standard three
track plotter (Gulton plotter), you are restricted to a three-track
presentation. Most "during the run" remarks can be annotated directly
on the log provided the remarks are not lengthy and they do not
overlap log traces. Pre- and post-run remarks should be provided in
the Remarks page of the Main Header. Realtime zeta logs can utilize
track IV for annotations.

All of the information on DDG provided above was taken from the
Drilling Dynamics Field Operations Manual. It is required that a copy
of this manual be obtained before running the DDG Service.
At the beginning of each run, list the following:

Teleco run number and depth interval.

Client bit number.

Bit make, model, size, TFA, grading in (i.e., re-run), IADC code.

5-10

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Drilling Dynamics

During the run, note the following:

Reaming on connections (be sure to note the frequency and


reason for reaming).

Drag on connection.

Mud weight changes with explanations for the change.

RPM ranges.

Surface weight on bit changes.

Pump stroke rate and change.

Rotary or oriented drilling.

Geologic horizons.

Explanation of log events as they occur.

At the end of each bit run, note the following:

Reason for pulling out of the hole.

Note any reaming hole conditions.

Bit grading.

Wear on the stabilizers.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

5-11
Confidential

Drilling Dynamics

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

5-12

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Chapter

Short Normal Resistivity


This chapter provides instructions on gathering and
processing measurements for Short Normal Resistivity
Service. Log presentations are included at the back of the
chapter.

Introduction
The Short Normal Resistivity Service represents a basic and relatively
inexpensive alternative in Formation Evaluation Logging Services. Prior to
the commercial release of 2 MHz electromagnetic wave propagation tools
(DPR), this was the only MWD formation evaluation logging tool available
on the market. This is a current emitting resistivity device coupled with
either a geiger-mueller or scintillator gamma ray detector. Since the
resistivity sensor is a current device, it is severely limited in the mud types
it can effectively operate in. However, it can be used quite effectively in
water-based muds with a chloride content below 20,000 ppm. It cannot be
used in oil-based muds. Although this service does have the capability to
store data in the MTC memory, a commercial rigsite memory (RWD)
service is not available at this time. The RGD Service's principal
applications are wellsite log correlation, casing point selection,
conventional core point selection, preliminary evaluation of potential pay
zones, and most importantly, realtime abnormal pore pressure detection.

Mud Types
Freshwater mud systems.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

6-1
Confidential

Short Normal Resistivity

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Borehole Correction Inputs


Gamma Ray
Tool size, hole size, mud weight, %K (potassium content), sensor type,
gamma API correction factor.
Short Normal Resistivity
Tool size, hole size, resistivity of the mud (Rm).

Data Editing
Editing of Realtime Data
Because of occasional decoding problems that can introduce bad data into
the database, it is necessary to edit periodically. Editing should be prudent.
Obvious bad data should be removed from the database. Under no
circumstances should the data be replaced or altered. It is preferred that
questionable data remain in the database. This data should be identified and
referenced on the log with a remark.
Depth Shifts
Make sure logging depths are as accurate as possible. Make depth shifts in
the database where necessary. Anytime depths differ at a depth at kelly
down by 1.0 foot (0.45 meters) or greater, a depth shift should be
performed. Depth shifts can be minimized by frequently calibrating the
Kelly Height sensor at kelly down and updating the depth at kelly down at
every connection.

Data Management
M-SERIES
A raw database file should be stored on the hard disk (Winchester) and an
edited database file backed up on disk. If a Winchester is not used on the
rigsite, a raw database file also should be backed up to disk. Provide all
necessary information on every disk label, and use an easy to follow
sequential numbering scheme for labeling disks.
P-SERIES
The database file should be backed up to tape periodically during the job.
Both edited and raw data are maintained in the same database, so there is
no distinction between the two like M-SERIES.
6-2

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Short Normal Resistivity

HPUTIL
When M-SERIES (MWD data) or P-SERIES XFER files (MWD data) are
converted to binary files for plotting with MPLOT, then several file types
should be backed up to disk. These are as follows:

binary.* (includes .fil, .apd, .uni, .idx),

*.cfg (HPUTIL Rev. 2.1 or greater)

setup.fil (Mplot/Wplot formats...formally newplot.fil)

log.fil (Makelog/Head/Minihead formats)

tvddata.fil

newplot.fil (use with HPUTIL versions earlier than Rev. 2.1)

header.fil (use with HPUTIL versions earlier than Rev. 2.1)

comment.fil

Rigsite Data Processing


Smoothing and/or Averaging
M-SERIES
None applied to the database. User selective smoothing or averaging
applied when plotting (see log formats for recommended curve
smoothing).
P-SERIES
None applied to the realtime database. User selective smoothing or
averaging can be applied when plotting (see log formats for recommended
curve smoothing).
HPUTIL
If Squeeze is applied to the binary.fil, backplots are removed and data is
averaged on a 0.25 feet (0.1 meter) interval. User selective smoothing can
also be applied when plotting (see log formats for recommended curve
smoothing).

Filtering
None.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

6-3
Confidential

Short Normal Resistivity

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Other
Borehole Corrections
Automatically applied by surface software (see Borehole Correction
Inputs on page 6-2).
Squeeze
Squeeze is required for non-P-SERIES databases (HPUTIL binary files).
Apply to binary files before plotting final logs with Gulton plotters.
Squeeze compresses the data file by removing all backplots, then averages
the data on a 0.25 feet (0.1 meter) average. (For more information, see
Squeeze on page 1-5.)
Quicken
Quicken is not required but highly recommended for non-P-SERIES
databases (HPTUIL binary files). Apply to binary files after Squeeze is
performed. This application sets up indices for every 100 feet (50 meters)
of log, which speeds up the depth search routine for the MEDIT editor.
(For more information, see Quicken on page 1-5).
ADDTSD
ADDTSD is required for non-P-SERIES databases (HPUTIL binary files).
Apply to binary file as needed during job. This application calculates the
time since drilled and data density curves for MWD and RWD data.
Calculate from the short normal resistivity (RSAX) unless otherwise
requested. (For more information, see page 2-7.)
ADDTVD
ADDTVD is required on every horizontal well. This routine calculates and
arranges directional data (true vertical depth) so it can be plotted as a curve.
This is an HPUTIL utility program. (For more information, see True
Vertical Depth on page 2-8.)
Note: No other rigsite data processing is required unless
incorrect borehole corrections have been entered into the
database. If this occurs, enter the correct correction
factors and recalculate the database.

6-4

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Short Normal Resistivity

Postwell Data Processing


Before Final Logs
None.

After Final Logs - LIS ASCII File and Tape


Performed using either WDS, LOGWORKS, or P-SERIES.

Rigsite Calibration Verification


Currently, none is required.

Quality Control
Quality Control Curves
Data Density
Data density (integrated) should be calculated from the short normal
resistivity (RSIX) and plotted on the quantitative log as tick marks in the
depth track on the left-hand side.
Time Since Drilled
Time since drilled (RSTX) should be plotted on the quantitative log with a
linear grid, preferably in track III with conductivity, weight on bit, etc. The
line type should be a medium spot.

Log Quality Control


You are responsible as a logging engineer to periodically evaluate the data
quality of your logs. Generate quantitative logs and inspect the curves for
areas that might suggest a compromise in quality. If areas characterized by
poor quality are detected, notify the office (Teleco) and the client
immediately. Under these circumstances, the client should be given the
opportunity to recover either lost or poorly recorded data.

Typical Log Response


Gamma Ray
The gamma ray sensor is primarily a lithology indicator. It measures the
natural gamma ray radiation that is emitted from naturally occurring
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

6-5
Confidential

Short Normal Resistivity

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

radioactive elements (uranium, thorium, and potassium) deposited within


the surrounding formations. As it turns out, shale generally contains much
higher quantities of these radioactive substances than sandstones and
carbonates (limestone and dolomite). Therefore, the gamma ray sensor can
in most cases easily distinguish between shales and non-shale formations.

Shales are generally identified by high gamma ray readings


(greater than 100 MWD-API units).

Non-shale formations (sandstones and carbonates) are identified


by relatively low gamma ray readings (lower than 60 MWD-API
units).

Short Normal Resistivity


The short normal resistivity measurement is very sensitive to conductive
muds (very low Rm), high formation resistivities, and increasing borehole
size relative to tool size. Therefore, when the ratio Ra / Rm is large, the
borehole correction is large and can result in anomalously high corrected
formation resistivities (Rcorr). This is compounded with increasingly larger
boreholes relative to the tool size. The responses below assume an
appreciable amount of invasion. If there is little to no invasion, Ra should
read close to Rt.
Permeable Zones (No Hydrocarbons)
1.

When Rmf < Rw , then Ra is lower than Rt and Rcorr may be higher
than Rt (this depends on Ra / Rm and borehole size relative to tool
size).

2.

When Rmf > Rw , then Ra is higher than Rt and Rcorr may be lower
than Ra but probably still higher than Rt (this depends largely on
the depth of invasion and Rw).

Impermeable Zones
1.

If mud is fresh (high Rm), then Ra should read close to Rt , if Rt is


not too high (greater than 20 to 50 ohmm).

2.

If mud is conductive (low Rm), then Ra will read lower than Rt .

Other Requirements for This Service


Surface measurement of Rm and Rmf corrected for bottom-hole circulating
temperature required on a daily basis. This data should be supplied on the
header of each daily log with BHCT (see Main Header, Environmental
Parameters on page 3-8 for additional mud information and measurement
procedures).
6-6

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Short Normal Resistivity

Log Presentation
North and South America Log Presentations
1:600 AND 1:1200 ENGLISH DEFAULT LOG FORMATS (correlation)
Track 1: Linear
Trace
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Track
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
3

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

GRAX
ROPS
TVD1
RSAX
RSAX
CSAX
CSAX
TCDX2

0
1000
VAR
0
0
4000
8000
VAR

150
0
IABLE
2
10
0
4000
IABLE

MLIN
5DSH
HSPT
MLIN
MLIN
MLIN
MDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
NB
WRAP
X10
NB
NB
WRAP

Smooth

Pen Up

3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
10
100
10
10
10
10
100

Notes

Optional

Back up

1:240 ENGLISH DEFAULT LOG FORMAT (quantitative)


Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
1
1
LHDD
2
3
3
3

GRAX
ROPS
TVD1
RSIX3
RSAX
CSAX
CSAX
RSTX

0
1000
VAR
**
0.2
4000
8000
0

150
0
IABLE
**
20
0
4000
300

MLIN
2DSH
HSPT
**
MLIN
MLIN
MDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
NB
**
OVER
NB
NB
X10

1.

Track 3: Linear
Smooth
0.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
10
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional

Back up

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale should
increase from left to right.

2.

TCDX: Scale should increase from left to right.

3.

RSIX: The output and presentation of this trace are predetermined. However, you
must input a number in these parameters to prevent MPLOT from crashing.
Presentation is in the depth track.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

6-7
Confidential

Short Normal Resistivity

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

International Log Presentations


1:500 METRIC DEFAULT LOG FORMAT (correlation)
Track 1: Linear
Trace
1
2
3
4
5
6

Track
1
1
1
2
3
3

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

GRAX
TCDX1
TVD2
RSAX
ROPS3
WBCS4

0
0
VAR
0.2
100
0

150
250
IABLE
20
0
100

MLIN
MSPT
HSPT
MLIN
5LIN
MDSH

WRAP
WRAP
NB
OVER
WRAP
WRAP

0.25
0
0
0
0
0

10
100
100
10
10
10

Notes

Optional

1:200 METRIC DEFAULT LOG FORMAT (quantitative)


Track 1: Linear
Trace

Track

Param

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
1
1
LHDD
2
2
3
3
3

GRAX
TCDX1
TVD2
RSIX5
RSAX
RSCX
ROPS3
WBCS4
RSTX

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

0
0
VAR
**
0.2
0.2
100
0
0

150
250
IABLE
**
20
20
0
100
300

MLIN
MSPT
HSPT
**
MDSH
MLIN
2LIN
MDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
NB
**
OVER
OVER
WRAP
WRAP
X10

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
100
100
10
10
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional

1.

TCDX: Default units are Celsius. Other default units and scales are 0 - 250F.

2.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale should
increase from left to right.

3.

ROPS: Default units are ft/hr. Other default units and scales are 100 -0 m/hr, 60 - 0
min/ft, 60 - 0 min/m, 10 - 0 ft/min, 10 - 0 m/min. Default for averaging is also feet.
Metric equivalent is 2.0 (for 1:500) and 1.0 (for 1:200).

4.

WBCS: Default units are K-lbs. Optional units and scales are 0 - 50 Tonnes, 0 - 500
KN.

5.

RSIX: The output and presentation of this trace are predetermined. However, you
must input a number in these parameters to prevent MPLOT from crashing.
Presentation is in the depth track.

Note: Pen up intervals are in feet. Metric equivalent is 3 meters


(for 10 feet) and 30 meters (for 100 feet).

6-8

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Chapter

Dual Propagation Resistivity


This chapter provides instructions on gathering and
processing measurements for Dual Propagation Resistivity
Service. Log presentations are included at the back of the
chapter.

Introduction
The Dual Propagation Resistivity Service combines a scintillation gamma
ray detector and a 2MHz electromagnetic wave propagation resistivity
detector with downhole memory capabilities. The high acquisition rates
achieved by both sensors (as fast as every 5 seconds) combined with
downhole memory (RWD) allow for a high resolution wireline
replacement RWD gamma ray/resistivity log. The resistivity detector
operates under the same principal as wireline induction tools. It is thus
more accurately referred to as a conductivity reading device. One major
advantage to this tool is that it measures two resistivities with different
depths of investigation. As Rt varies from 0.2 to 20 ohmm, the depth of
investigation for the phase difference ranges from 23 to 58 inches, and the
depth of investigation for the amplitude ratio ranges from 35 to 105 inches.
This tool also has superior thin bed resolution and detection. The phase
difference resistivity can detect beds as thin as 6 inches. Advanced
modeling capabilities for this service in house permit "pre-well" modeling
at the clients request. The commercialization of this service represented a
major breakthrough for MWD Formation Evaluation. This sub is always
located at the bottom of the down-hole assembly regardless of the
configuration (i.e., double, triple combo, etc.).

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

7-1
Confidential

Dual Propagation Resistivity

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Mud Types
All mud systems, although loss of depth of investigation occurs in highly
salt-saturated muds.

Borehole Correction Inputs


Gamma Ray
Tool size, hole size, mud weight, %K (potassium content), sensor type,
gamma API correction factor.
Dual Propagation Resistivity
Tool size, hole size, resistivity of the mud Rm , and constants (base offsets
and temperature characterization constants).

Data Editing
Editing of Realtime Data
Editing of realtime DPR data is not allowed. There are two reasons for this.
Because of the superior thin bed detection capabilities of the DPR, what
may appear as data spikes due to decoding problems may in fact be real
data. Also, realtime formation records are needed to accurately assign
depths to the memory data. In the event severe decoding problems exist
and the quality of the MWD log is lowered, editing is allowed provided the
logging engineer has consent from the customer. In this case, the logging
engineer is required to notify the Teleco office, then notify the client and
request consent to edit the MWD log. If editing takes place, the engineer
shall maintain a separate copy of unedited raw data that he shall use for
processing memory data. Any and all editing should be prudent. If data is
edited, it should be removed from the database. Under no circumstances
should the data be replaced or altered. It is preferred that questionable data
remain in the database. This data should be identified and referenced on the
log as such with a remark.
Editing of Memory Data
This is strictly prohibited. There are several reasons for this. We should
let the client decide whether the data in question is useful to him or not. It is
our job and responsibility as logging engineers, however, to identify data
that is most likely in error (for whatever reason) and documenting this as
such on the log. If the client requests an edited memory log with suspect

7-2

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Dual Propagation Resistivity

data removed, a separate log should be made and documented as such. The
LIS tape should contain all of the original memory data.
When an interval of questionable data is recorded and identified, the client
should be notified and a relog should be recommended. The concept of relogging a particular interval to determine the repeatability of logging
sensors is a standard practice in the logging industry. In order to establish
repeatability, it is important to relog a zone where the log response is not in
question in addition to relogging the questionable zone. Discuss this with
the client. If the client declines to relog the interval, document this as well
as the questionable interval on the Remarks page of the log.
Depth Shifts
Make sure logging depths are as accurate as possible. This is crucial for
this service. Make depth shifts in the database where necessary. Anytime
depths differ at a depth at kelly down by 1.0 foot (0.45 meters) or greater, a
depth shift should be performed. Depth shifts can be minimized by
frequently calibrating the Kelly Height sensor at kelly down and updating
the depth at kelly down at every connection.

Data Management
M-SERIES
A raw database file should be stored on the hard disk (Winchester) and a
raw file backed up to floppy disk. In the event that editing of the MWD
data occurs, a copy of raw unedited data shall be maintained for processing
memory data (see Data Editing above). If a Winchester is not used on the
rigsite, a raw database file also shall be maintained on floppy disk. Provide
all necessary information on every disk label, and use an easy to follow
sequential numbering scheme for labeling disks.
MDMS
Two file types need to be backed up to disk. These are the raw memory
dump data and the XFER file. Both of these need to be backed up on a run
by run basis.
P-SERIES
The database file should be backed up to tape periodically during the job.
Both edited and raw data are maintained in the same database, so there is
no distinction between the two like M-SERIES.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

7-3
Confidential

Dual Propagation Resistivity

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

HPUTIL
When M-SERIES (MWD data), MDMS XFER files (RWD data), or
P-SERIES XFER files (MWD or RWD data) are processed to binary files
for plotting with MPLOT, then several file types should be backed up to
disk. These are as follows:

binary.* (includes .fil, .apd, .uni, .idx),

*.cfg (HPUTIL Rev. 2.1 or greater)

setup.fil (Mplot/Wplot formats...formally newplot.fil)

log.fil (Makelog/Head/Minihead formats)

tvddata.fil

newplot.fil (use with HPUTIL versions earlier than Rev. 2.1)

header.fil (use with HPUTIL versions earlier than Rev. 2.1)

comment.fil

These files can be compressed using PKZIP and backed up to floppy disk
using FASTBACK with the program Getdata (see Getdata Disks on page
1-4).

Rigsite Data Processing


Smoothing and/or Averaging
M-SERIES
None applied to the database. User selectable smoothing or averaging can
be applied when plotting (see log formats for recommended curve
smoothing).
MDMS
Processes raw memory dump data with MWD data and creates an
XFER.FIL. Use MPLOT Utilities in HPUTIL to process XFER File into
binary file. Run Squeeze to remove backplots and average data on a 0.25
feet (0.1 meter) interval (see Squeeze on page 7-5).
P-SERIES
None applied to the realtime database. User selectable averaging
(averaging on/off, it is recommended to select averaging) for RWD
processing. Propagation resistivities are block averaged on a 0.25 feet (0.1
meter) interval. See Filtering below for exclusive filtering routines
applied to gamma ray data. During processing of data, backplots are
7-4

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Dual Propagation Resistivity

removed. User selectable smoothing or averaging can also be applied when


plotting (however, if the data is processed with averaging selected, it is not
recommended to smooth during plotting).
HPUTIL
If Squeeze is applied to the binary.fil, data is averaged on a 0.25 feet (0.1
meter) interval. User selectable smoothing can also be applied when
plotting (see log formats for recommended curve smoothing).

Filtering
Hanning window filter is available only in P-SERIES 2.01 and above and
is applied to gamma ray data. This routine filters as the data is placed on a
0.25 feet (0.1 meter) interval.

Other
Borehole Corrections
Automatically applied by surface software (see Borehole Correction
Inputs on page 7-2).
Dielectric Corrections
Performed as required. This will be a rigsite option with P-SERIES 2.01
and above. Applied to phase difference and amplitude ratio resistivities
when these data are affected by formation dielectric effects.
Squeeze
Squeeze is required for non-P-SERIES databases (HPUTIL binary files).
Apply to binary files before plotting final logs with Gulton plotters.
Squeeze compresses the data file by removing all backplots and then
averages the data on a 0.25 feet (0.1 meter) average. (For more
information, see Squeeze on page 1-5.)
Quicken
Quicken is not required but is highly recommended for non-P-SERIES
databases (HPUTIL binary files). Apply to binary files after Squeeze is
performed. This application sets up indices for every 100 feet (50 meters)
of log, which speeds up the depth search routine for the MEDIT editor.
(For more information, see Quicken on page 1-5).
ADDTSD
ADDTSD is required for non-P-SERIES databases (HPUTIL binary files).
Apply to binary file as needed during job. This application calculates the
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

7-5
Confidential

Dual Propagation Resistivity

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

time since drilled and data density curves for MWD and RWD data.
Calculate from the phase difference resistivity (RPCM) unless otherwise
requested. (For more information, see page 2-7.)
ADDTVD
ADDTVD is required on every horizontal well. This routine calculates and
arranges directional data (true vertical depth) so it can be plotted as a curve.
This is an HPUTIL utility program. (For more information, see True
Vertical Depth on page 2-8.)
Note: No other rigsite data processing is required unless
incorrect or base offsets and temperature
characterization data and/or incorrect borehole
corrections have been entered into the database. If this
occurs, enter the correct correction factors and
recalculate the database.

Postwell Data Processing


Before Final Logs
Dielectric Corrections
Performed as required. Applied to phase difference and amplitude ratio
resistivities when these data are affected by dielectric effects. This can be
performed either in P-SERIES 2.01 or above, or WDS.
Inversion
Performed as required. Applied to logs that are characterized by thin bed
effects. Performed in WDS.

After Final Logs


Postwell WDS Log Analysis
Performed at clients request by Regional Log Analyst. For detailed log
analysis will need wireline bulk density or density porosity and neutron
porosity.
LIS ASCII File and Tape
Performed in either MDMS, P-SERIES, LOGWORKS, or WDS.

7-6

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Dual Propagation Resistivity

Rigsite Calibration Verification


Pre-run and post-run airhang required for qualitative verification of phase
difference and attenuation resistivities and gamma ray sensors.

Quality Control
Quality Control Curves
Data Density
Data density (integrated) should be calculated from phase difference
(RPIM) and plotted on the quantitative log as tick marks in the depth track
on the left-hand side.
Time Since Drilled
Time since drilled should be calculated from phase difference (RPTM) and
plotted on the quantitative log with a linear grid, preferably in track III with
conductivity, weight on bit, etc. The trace should have a medium spot line
type.

Log Quality Control


You are responsible as a logging engineer to periodically evaluate the data
quality of your logs. Generate a quantitative log and inspect the curves for
areas that might suggest a compromise in quality. If areas characterized by
poor quality are detected, notify the office (Teleco) and the client
immediately. Under these circumstances, the client should be given the
opportunity to recover either lost or poorly recorded data.
Listed below are required log quality checks that need to be performed for
the DPR service. If during these checks you identify a problem area, you
are required to call the office for recommendations.
1.

Identification of Separation between Rpd and Rat: A


quantitative log is required for adequate evaluation. Whenever a
separation between these curves occurs, it is due to either
formation effects or improper tool response. It is very difficult to
determine which of these it might be, so it is important that the
logging engineer notify the office (Teleco). With the client's
permission, it is recommended that a quantitative log be faxed
into the office (this may be a requirement in your region). If logs
are made and faxed to the office, it is most important that a
header accompany the log with all of the following information:
hole size, hole angle, mud type, mud weight, mud chlorides

Reference Manual

7-7

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Confidential

Dual Propagation Resistivity

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

(ppm), (Rm and Rmf) at surface measured temperature, and BHCT.


Call the office for recommendations. Additionally, the engineer
should calculate the phase difference and amplitude ratio
resistivities using a transform chart (see memo from Rob Randall
entitled "Verification of DPR Sub Calibration Factors," dated 21
August 1991). If the resistivities differ from what the realtime
computer printout shows, then suspect the correction factors
entered and used by the computer. If the resistivities are
approximately what is shown from the realtime printout, suspect
either formation effects or tool response problems.
2.

Realtime vs. Memory Data Comparison: A quantitative log is


required for adequate evaluation. At the end of each run after the
memory data has been processed, a log should be made with the
realtime and memory data plotted side by side (i.e., realtime Rpd
and Rat data in track II, memory Rpd and Rat data in track III). The
engineer should evaluate the log for depth shifts between the
realtime and memory data. Depth shifts result when incorrect
time offsets are applied before processing. If depth shifts are
identified, call the office for recommendations.

3.

Realtime vs. Relog Data Comparison

A quantitative log is required for adequate evaluation. After


a relog (second pass) is performed, it is important to plot the
memory relog data with the "original pass" realtime data.
Plot realtime and memory gamma ray in track I and original
pass realtime Rpd with memory relog Rpd in track II. It is not
necessary to plot Rat. Evaluate this data for depth shifts. If
depth shifts are identified, call the office for
recommendations.

If memory relog data is merged with "on bottom" data, a


composite log that contains the realtime "on bottom" data
and the memory merged relog data should be plotted and
evaluated for depth discrepancies. Plot the realtime "on
bottom" and the memory merged relog gamma ray together
in track I. Plot the realtime "on bottom" and the merged
relog Rpd in track II. It is not necessary to plot Rat . If depth
discrepancies occur, call the office for recommendations.

7-8

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Dual Propagation Resistivity

Typical Log Response


Gamma Ray
The gamma ray sensor is primarily a lithology indicator. It measures the
natural gamma ray radiation that is emitted from naturally occurring
radioactive elements (uranium, thorium, and potassium) deposited within
the surrounding formations. As it turns out, shale generally contains much
higher quantities of these radioactive substances than sandstones and
carbonates (limestone and dolomite). Therefore, the gamma ray sensor can,
in most cases, easily distinguish between shales and non-shale formations.

Shales are generally identified by high gamma ray readings


(greater than 100 MWD-API units).

Non-shale formations (sandstones and carbonates) are identified


by relatively low gamma ray readings (lower than 60 MWD-API
units).

Dual Propagation Resistivity


After borehole corrections have been applied and relatively standard
borehole conditions exist, the following relationships between Rpd and Rat
should apply.
Permeable Zones
When Rmf < Rw , then Rpd < Rat
When Rmf > Rw , then Rpd > Rat
In both cases, the amount of separation will depend on the depth of
invasion, the relative values of Rmf , Rw , and the filtrate and water
saturations.
Impermeable Zones (Shales)
When Rmf < Rw , then Rpd Rat
When Rmf > Rw , then Rpd Rat
Dielectric Formations
Rpd < Rat

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

7-9
Confidential

Dual Propagation Resistivity

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Thin Beds Intersecting Borehole at High Incident Angles


(Above 80)
Rpd > Rat
Eccentricity
Typically, no effect unless a large contrast between Rm and Rt exists (either
Rm much greater than Rt , or Rt much greater than Rm ). Under these
circumstances Rpd < Rat .

Other Requirements for This Service


Surface measurement of Rm and Rmf corrected for bottom-hole circulating
temperature required on a daily basis. This data should be supplied on the
header of each daily log with BHCT (see Main Header, Environmental
Parameters on page 3-8 for measurement procedures).

7-10

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Dual Propagation Resistivity

Log Presentation
Note: All log formats listed below assume the data is either
realtime or memory data that has been processed without
a P-SERIES system (or with a P-SERIES system "without
averaging" selected for processing) and plotted using
MPLOT. In cases where a P-SERIES system was used
and the data was processed using the "averaging" option,
then it is recommended not to smooth during plotting.
This will result in over smoothed logging traces. This will
most frequently affect the Gamma Ray MWD API trace.

North and South America Log Presentations


1:600 AND 1:1200 ENGLISH LOG FORMATS
Track 1: Linear
Trace
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Track
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

GRAM
ROPS
TVD1
RPCM
RPCM
RACM
CPCM
CPCM
TCDM2

0
1000
VAR
0
0
0
4000
8000
VAR

150
0
IABLE
2
10
10
0
4000
IABLE

MLIN
5DSH
HSPT
MLIN
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN
MDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
NB
NB
X10
X10
NB
NB
WRAP

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Smooth
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
10
10
10
10
10
100

Notes

Optional

Back up

7-11
Confidential

Dual Propagation Resistivity

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

1:240 ENGLISH DEFAULT LOG FORMAT (quantitative)


Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
1
1
LHDD
2
2
3
3
3

GRAM
ROPS
TVD1
RPIM3
RPCM
RACM
CPCM
CPCM
RPTM

0
1000
VAR
**
0.2
0.2
4000
8000
0

150
0
IABLE
**
20
20
0
4000
300

MLIN
2DSH
HSPT
**
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN
MDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
NB
**
OVER
OVER
NB
NB
X10

0.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
10
100
10
10
10
10
10
10

1.

Notes

Optional

Back up

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

2.

TCDM: Scale increases from left to right.

3.

RPIM: The output and presentation of this trace is predetermined. However, a number
must be input into these parameters to prevent MPLOT from crashing. Presentation is
in the depth track.

ALTERNATE 1:240 ENGLISH LOG FORMAT (quantitative)


Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: 2 Cycle Log

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

1
1
1
1
LHDD
2&3
2&3

GRAM
ROPS
RPTM1
TVD2
RPIM3
RPCM
RACM

0
1000
0
VAR
**
0.2
0.2

150
0
300
IABLE
**
20
20

MLIN
2DSH
MSPT
HSPT
**
MLIN
MDSH

WRAP
WRAP
X10
NB
**
OVER
OVER

0.5
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
10
10
100
10
10
10

Notes

Optional

1.

RPTM: Since tracks 2 and 3 contain a logarithmic grid and time since drilled is a
linear curve, plot the time since drilled trace in track 1.

2.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

3.

RPIM: The output and presentation of this trace is predetermined. However, a number
must be input into these parameters to prevent MPLOT from crashing. Presentation is
in the depth track.

7-12

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Dual Propagation Resistivity

International Log Presentations


1:500 METRIC LOG FORMAT (correlation)
Track 1: Linear
Trace
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Track
1
1
1
2
2
2
3

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

GRAM
TCDM1
TVD2
RPCM
RACM
ROPS3
WBCS4

0
0
VAR
0.2
0.2
100
0

150
250
IABLE
20
20
0
100

MLIN
MSPT
HSPT
MLIN
MDSH
5LIN
MDSH

WRAP
WRAP
NB
OVER
OVER
WRAP
WRAP

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
100
100
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional

1:200 METRIC LOG FORMAT (quantitative)


Track 1: Linear
Trace

Track

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
1
1
LHD
D
2
2
2
3
3

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

GRAM
TCDM1
TVD2
RPIM5
RPCM
RACM
ROPS3
WBCS4
RPTM

0
0
VAR
**
0.2
0.2
100
0
0

150
250
IABLE
**
20
20
0
100
600

MLIN
MSPT
HSPT
**
MLIN
MDSH
2LIN
MDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
NB
**
OVER
OVER
WRAP
WRAP
X10

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
100
100
10
10
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional

1.

TCDM: Default units are Celsius. Other default units and scales are 0 - 250 Fahrenheit.

2.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale should
increase from left to right.

3.

ROPS: Default units are ft/hr. Other default units and scales are 100 - 0 m/hr, 60 - 0
min/ft, 60 - 0 min/m, 10 - 0 ft/min, 10 - 0 m/min. Default for averaging is also feet.
Metric equivalent is 2.0 (for 1:500 metric) and 1.0 (for 1:200 metric).

4.

WBCS: Default units are K-lbs. Optional units and scales are 0 - 50 Tonnes, 0 - 500
KN.

5.

RPIM: The output and presentation of this trace is predetermined. However, you must
input a number in these parameters to prevent MPLOT from crashing. Presentation is
in the depth track.

Note: Pen up intervals are in feet. Metric equivalent is 3 meters


(for 10 feet) and 30 meters (for 100 feet).

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

7-13
Confidential

Dual Propagation Resistivity

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

ALTERNATE 1:200 METRIC LOG FORMAT (quantitative)


Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: 2 Cycle Log

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
1
1
1
1
LHDD
2&3
2&3

GRAM
ROPS1
TCDM2
TVD3
RPTM
RPIM4
RPCM
RACM

0
200
0
VAR
0
**
0.2
0.2

150
0
250
IABLE
600
**
2000
2000

MLIN
2DSH
MSPT
HSPT
MSPT
**
MLIN
MDSH

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
NB
X10
**
OVER
OVER

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
10
100
100
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional

1.

ROPS: Default units are ft/hr. Other default units and scales are 100 - 0 m/hr, 60 - 0
min/ft, 60 - 0 min/m, 10 - 0 ft/min, 10 - 0 m/min. Default for averaging is also feet.
Metric equivalent is 2.0 (for 1:500 metric) and 1.0 (for 1:200 metric).

2.

TCDM: Default units are Celsius. Other default units and scales are 0 - 250F.

3.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale should
increase from left to right.

4.

RPIM: The output and presentation of this trace are predetermined. However, you
must input a number in these parameters to prevent MPLOT from crashing.
Presentation is in the depth track.

7-14

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Chapter

Double Combo
This chapter provides instructions on gathering and
processing measurements using the Double Combo tool.
Log presentations are included at the back of the chapter.

Introduction
The Modular Neutron Porosity tool is the first MWD nuclear source
measurement commercialized by Teleco. Instead of relying on existing
wireline technology to develop this tool, Teleco chose to advance and push
the existing formation evaluation technology higher. This tool not only
incorporates state-of-the-art detectors but also utilizes Teleco's modular
design for advanced formation evaluation tools. This tool utilizes a 5 Curie
Americium 241 Beryllium neutron source, which emits a cloud of neutrons
into the surrounding formation as the tool advances in the wellbore.
Returning neutrons are sampled by near and far detectors and are used to
infer formation porosity. Although this tool indirectly measures porosity, it
is used more frequently for identification of hydrocarbons (specifically
gas). In the presence of gas, the neutron porosity response
characteristically decreases (reads lower porosity). If this measurement is
combined with a density porosity measurement (which is not affected by
hydrocarbons), a characteristic cross-over pattern between the two log
traces develops (whereby the neutron porosity trace falls below the density
porosity trace). It is this characteristic cross over pattern that log analysts
look for when evaluating potential (gas) reservoirs. This sub is typically
located above the propagation resistivity sub in a double combo
configuration and above both the density and propagation resistivity subs
in a triple combo configuration.
Internally, the tool uses two (near and far) solid state Li6 glass scintillators
coupled with photomultiplier tubes to detect incoming neutrons. A state of
the art 256-multichannel analyzer is used to detect neutrons in the correct
energy window and to strip away unwanted detected gamma rays. A
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

8-1
Confidential

Double Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

programmable gain amplifier also ensures proper peak location at elevated


temperatures. This tool is modular in design, which means the detector and
associated electronics are housed in its own sub. Electrical power and
communications from the main MWD collar to the modular tool sub occurs
over a single wire bus. This single wire bus maintains communication from
sub to collar via conductive contact rings mounted in the shoulder of each
sub and the main MWD collar. As a result, this sub can be conveniently
added or removed from the Teleco bottom-hole assembly as needed at the
rigsite.

Mud Types
All mud systems.

Borehole Correction Inputs


Gamma Ray
Tool size, hole size, mud weight, %K (potassium content), gamma API
correction factor.
Dual Propagation Resistivity
Tool size, hole size, resistivity of the mud Rm , and constants (base offsets
and temperature characterization constants).
Modular Neutron Porosity
Tool size, hole size, mud density, borehole salinity.

Data Editing
Editing of Realtime Data
Editing of realtime MNP data is not allowed. The realtime formation
records are needed to accurately assign depths to the memory data. In the
event severe decoding problems exist and the quality of the MWD log is
lowered, editing is allowed provided the logging engineer has consent from
the customer. In this case, the logging engineer is required to notify the
Teleco office, then notify the client and request consent to edit the MWD
log. If editing takes place, the engineer shall maintain a separate copy of
unedited raw data that he shall use for processing memory data. Any and
all editing should be prudent. If data is edited, it should be removed from
the database. Under no circumstances should the data be replaced or

8-2

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Double Combo

altered. It is preferred that questionable data remain in the database. This


data should be identified and referenced on the log as such with a remark.
Editing of Memory Data
This is strictly prohibited. There are several reasons for this. We should
let the client decide whether the data in question is useful to him or not. It is
our job and responsibility as logging engineers, however, to identify data
that is most likely in error (for whatever reason) and documenting this as
such on the log. If the client requests an edited memory log with suspect
data removed, a separate log should be made and documented as such. The
LIS tape should contain all of the original memory data.
When an interval of questionable data is recorded and identified, the client
should be notified and a relog should be recommended. The concept of relogging a particular interval to determine the repeatability of logging
sensors is a standard practice in the logging industry. In order to establish
repeatability, it is important to relog a zone where the log response is not in
question in addition to relogging the questionable zone. Discuss this with
the client. If the client declines to relog the interval, document this as well
as the questionable interval on the Remarks page of the log.
Depth Shifts
Make sure logging depths are as accurate as possible. This is crucial for
this service. Make depth shifts in the database where necessary. Anytime
depths differ at a depth at kelly down by 1.0 foot (0.45 meters) or greater, a
depth shift should be performed. Depth shifts can be minimized by
frequently calibrating the Kelly Height sensor at kelly down and updating
the depth at kelly down at every connection.

Data Management
M-SERIES
A raw database file should be stored on the hard disk (Winchester) and a
raw file backed up to disk. In the event that editing of the MWD data
occurs, a copy of raw unedited data shall be maintained for processing
memory data (see Data Editing above). If a Winchester is not used on the
rigsite, a raw database file also should be backed up to disk. Provide all
necessary information on every disk label, and use an easy to follow
sequential numbering scheme for labeling disks.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

8-3
Confidential

Double Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

MDMS
Two file types need to be backed up to disk. These are the raw memory
dump data and the XFER file. Both of these need to be backed up on a run
by run basis.
P-SERIES
The database file should be backed up to tape periodically during the job.
Both edited and raw data are maintained in the same database, so there is
no distinction between the two like M-SERIES.
HPUTIL
When M-SERIES (MWD data), MDMS XFER files (RWD data), or
P-SERIES files (MWD or RWD data) are converted to binary files for
plotting with MPLOT, then several file types should be backed up to disk.
These are as follows:

binary.* (includes .fil, .apd, .uni, .idx),

*.cfg (HPUTIL Rev. 2.1 or greater)

setup.fil (Mplot/Wplot formats...formally newplot.fil)

log.fil (Makelog/Head/Minihead formats)

tvddata.fil

newplot.fil (use with HPUTIL versions earlier than Rev. 2.1)

header.fil (use with HPUTIL versions earlier than Rev. 2.1)

comment.fil

These files can be compressed using PKZIP and backed up to disk using
FASTBACK with the program Getdata (see Getdata Disks on page 1-4).

Rigsite Data Processing


Smoothing and/or Averaging
M-SERIES
None applied to the database. User selective smoothing or averaging can be
applied when plotting (see log formats for recommended curve
smoothing).

8-4

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Double Combo

MDMS
MDMS processes raw memory dump data with MWD data and creates an
XFER.FIL. Use MPLOT Utilities in HPUTIL to process XFER File into
binary file. Use Squeeze to remove backplots and average data on a 0.25
feet (0.1 meter) interval (see Squeeze on page 8-5).
P-SERIES
None applied to the realtime database. User selective averaging (averaging
on/off, it is recommended to select averaging). Propagation resistivities are
block averaged on a 0.25 feet (0.1 meter) interval. See Filtering below
for exclusive filtering routines applied to neutron porosity and gamma ray
data). During processing of data, backplots are removed. Additionally, user
selective smoothing or averaging can be applied when plotting (however, if
the data is processed with averaging selected, it is not recommended to
smooth during plotting).
HPUTIL
If Squeeze is applied to the binary.fil, backplots are removed and data is
averaged on a 0.25 feet (0.1 meter) interval. Additionally, user selective
smoothing can be applied when plotting (see log formats for recommended
curve smoothing).

Filtering
Hanning window filter is available only in P-SERIES 2.0 and above.
Applied to neutron porosity and gamma ray data. This routine filters as the
data is placed on a 0.25 feet (0.1 meter) interval.

Other
Borehole Corrections
Applied automatically by surface software (see Borehole Correction
Inputs on page 8-2).
Dielectric Corrections
This will be a rigsite option with P-SERIES 2.01 and above. Applied to
phase difference and amplitude ratio resistivities when these data are
affected by formation dielectric effects.
Squeeze
Required for non-P-SERIES databases (HPUTIL binary files). Apply to
binary files before plotting final logs with Gulton plotters. Squeeze
compresses the data file by removing all backplots and then averages the
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

8-5
Confidential

Double Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

data on a 0.25 feet (0.1 meter) interval. (For more information, see
Squeeze on page 1-5.)
Quicken
Quicken is not required but is highly recommended for non-P-SERIES
databases (HPUTIL binary files). Apply to binary files after Squeeze is
performed. This application sets up indices for every 100 feet (50 meters)
of log, which speeds up the depth search routine for the MEDIT editor.
(For more information, see Quicken on page 1-5.)
ADDTSD
ADDTSD is required for non-P-SERIES databases (HPUTIL binary files).
Apply to binary file as needed during job. This application calculates the
time since drilled and data density curves for MWD and RWD data.
Calculate from the phase difference resistivity (RPCM) unless otherwise
requested. (For more information, see page 2-7.)
ADDTVD
ADDTVD is required on every horizontal well. This routine calculates and
arranges directional data (true vertical depth) so it can be plotted as a curve.
This is an HPUTIL utility program. (For more information, see True
Vertical Depth on page 2-8.)
WDS Quicklook Log Analysis
Performed as required.
Note: No other rigsite data processing is required unless
incorrect or base offsets and temperature
characterization data and/or incorrect borehole
corrections have been entered into the database. If this
occurs, enter the correct correction factors and
recalculate the database.

Postwell Data Processing


Before Final Logs
Dielectric Corrections
Performed as required. Applied to phase difference and amplitude ratio
resistivities when these data are affected by formation dielectric effects.
This can be performed either in P-SERIES 2.01 and above or WDS.

8-6

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Double Combo

Inversion
Performed as required. Applied to phase difference and amplitude ratio
resistivities when characterized by thin bed effects. Performed in WDS.

After Final Logs


Postwell WDS Log Analysis
Performed at clients request by Regional Log Analyst. Provides a more
detailed analysis of logging data than Quicklook.
LIS ASCII File and Tape
Performed in either MDMS, P-SERIES, LOGWORKS, or WDS at
customer's request.

Rigsite Calibration Verification


Required at the beginning and end of each run. Verification accomplished
using the neutron verifier and verification menu's in MDMS or P-SERIES
surface software. Verification data should be recorded on Calibration
Verification page on P-SERIES header. Verification procedures and
tolerances are currently under investigation. Therefore, they have been
purposely omitted.

Quality Control
Quality Control Curves
Data Density
Currently, data density is not calculated for neutron porosity or bulk
density. Use the data density calculated from phase difference resistivity
(RPIM). Data density (integrated) should be plotted on the quantitative log
as tick marks in the depth track on the left-hand side.
Time Since Drilled
Since there should be relatively little or no difference in the time since
drilled calculated from each sensor, use the time since drilled calculated
from phase difference resistivity unless DPR is not present or the client
requests otherwise. Plot time since drilled as a medium spot line on linear
grids. This trace should be plotted on quantitative logs only.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

8-7
Confidential

Double Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Log Quality Control


You are responsible as a logging engineer to periodically evaluate the data
quality of your logs. Generate quantitative logs and inspect the curves for
areas that might suggest a compromise in quality. If areas characterized by
poor quality are detected, notify the office (Teleco) and the client
immediately. Under these circumstances, the client should be given the
opportunity to recover either lost or poorly recorded data.
Listed below are required log quality checks that need to be performed for
any RWD service. If during these checks you identify a problem area, you
are required to call the office for recommendations.
Note: Refer to DPR Services (see Chapter 7) for additional
recommended DPR log quality checks. The DPR log
quality checks should be run in addition to the MNP log
quality checks.
1.

Realtime vs. Memory Data Comparison: A quantitative log is


required for adequate evaluation. At the end of each run after the
memory data has been processed, a log should be made with the
realtime and memory data plotted side by side (i.e., realtime
NPCX data in track II, memory NPCM data in track III). The
engineer should evaluate the log for depth shifts between the
realtime and memory data. Depth shifts result when incorrect
time offsets are applied before processing. If depth shifts are
identified, call the office for recommendations.

Note: There may be a difference between the realtime and


memory MNP log responses due to smoothing and
averaging that is not applied to realtime data (see
Rigsite Data Processing on page 8-4).
2.

Realtime vs. Relog Data Comparison

A quantitative log is required for adequate evaluation. After


a relog (second pass) is performed, it is important to plot the
memory relog data with the "original pass" realtime data.
Plot realtime and memory gamma ray in track I and original
pass realtime NPCX with memory relog NPCM in track III
(plotting DPR data in track III is optional). Evaluate this
data for depth shifts. If depth shifts are identified, call the
office for recommendations.

If memory relog data is merged with "on bottom" data, a


composite log that contains the realtime "on bottom" data
and the memory merged relog data should be plotted and

8-8

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Double Combo

evaluated for depth discrepancies. Plot the realtime "on


bottom" and the memory merged relog gamma ray together
in track I. Plot the realtime "on bottom" and the merged
relog in track III (plotting DPR data in track III is optional).
If depth discrepancies occur, call the office for
recommendations.

Typical Log Response


Gamma Ray
The gamma ray sensor is primarily a lithology indicator. It measures the
natural gamma ray radiation that is emitted from naturally occurring
radioactive elements (uranium, thorium, and potassium) deposited within
the surrounding formations. As it turns out, shale generally contains much
higher quantities of these radioactive substances than sandstones and
carbonates (limestone and dolomite). Therefore, the gamma ray sensor can
in most cases easily distinguish between shales and non-shale formations.

Shales are generally identified by high gamma ray readings


(greater than 100 MWD-API units).

Non-shale formations (sandstones and carbonates) are identified


by relatively low gamma ray readings (lower than 60 MWD-API
units).

Dual Propagation Resistivity


After borehole corrections have been applied and relatively standard
borehole conditions exist, the following relationships between Rpd and Rat
should apply.
Permeable Zones
When Rmf < Rw , then Rpd < Rat
When Rmf > Rw , then Rpd > Rat
In both cases, the amount of separation will depend on the depth of
invasion, the relative values of Rmf , Rw , and the filtrate and water
saturations.
Impermeable Zones (Shales)
When Rmf < Rw , then Rpd Rat
When Rmf > Rw , then Rpd Rat

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

8-9
Confidential

Double Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Dielectric Formations
Rpd < Rat
Thin Beds Intersecting Borehole at High Incident Angles
(Above 60)
Rpd > Rat
Eccentricity
Typically no effect unless a large contrast between Rm and Rt exists (either
Rm much greater than Rt , or Rt much greater than Rm ). Under these
circumstances Rpd < Rat .
Modular Neutron Porosity
After borehole corrections are applied, the following relationships should
apply. This also assumes the correct logging matrix (sandstone, limestone)
has been applied.
Clean Reservoir Rocks Filled with Either Water or Oil
NPCM reads correct porosity.
Clean Reservoir Rocks Filled with Gas
NPCM reads lower than true porosity.
Shale Zones
NPCM reads higher than true porosity.

Other Requirements for This Service


Surface measurement of Rm and Rmf corrected for bottom-hole circulating
temperature required on a daily basis. This data should be supplied on the
header of each daily log with BHCT (see Main Header, Environmental
Parameters on page 3-8 for measurement procedures).

8-10

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Double Combo

Log Presentation
Note: All log formats listed below assume the data is either
realtime or memory data that has been processed without
a P-SERIES system (or with a P-SERIES system "without
averaging" selected for processing) and plotted using
MPLOT. In cases where a P-SERIES system was used
and the data was processed using the "averaging" option,
then it is recommended not to smooth during plotting.
This will result in oversmoothed logging traces. This will
most frequently affect the Gamma Ray MWD API trace.

North and South America Log Presentations


1:600 AND 1:1200 ENGLISH DEFAULT LOG FORMATS (correlation)
LIMESTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear
Trace
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Track
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

GRAM
ROPS
TVD1
RPCM
RPCM
RACM
NPLM
TCDM2

0
1000
VAR
0
0
0
45
VAR

150
0
IABLE
2
10
10
-15
IABLE

MLIN
5DSH
HSPT
MLIN
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN
LSPT

WRAP
WRAP
NB
NB
X10
X10
WRAP
WRAP

Smooth
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
10
10
10
10
100

Notes

Optional

Optional

SANDSTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear
Trace
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Track
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

GRAM
ROPS
TVD1
RPCM
RPCM
RACM
NPSM
TCDM2

0
1000
VAR
0
0
0
60
VAR

150
0
IABLE
2
10
10
0
IABLE

MLIN
5DSH
HSPT
MLIN
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN
LSPT

WRAP
WRAP
NB
NB
X10
X10
WRAP
WRAP

Smooth
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
10
10
10
10
100

Notes

Optional

Optional

1.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

2.

TCDM: Optional curve for this presentation. Scale increases from left to right.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

8-11
Confidential

Double Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

1:240 ENGLISH DEFAULT LOG FORMATS (quantitative)


LIMESTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear
Trace
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

1
1
1
LHDD
2
2
3
3
3

GRAM
ROPS
TVD1
RPIM2
RPCM
RACM
NPLM
RPTM2
TCDM3

0
1000
VAR
**
0.2
0.2
45
0
VAR

150
0
IABLE
**
20
20
-15
300
IABLE

MLIN
2DSH
HSPT
**
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN
MSPT
LSPT

WRAP
WRAP
NB
**
OVER
OVER
WRAP
X10
WRAP

0.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
10
100
10
10
10
10
10
100

Notes

Optional

Optional

SANDSTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear
Trace
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

1
1
1
LHDD
2
2
3
3
3

GRAM
ROPS
TVD1
RPIM2
RPCM
RACM
NPSM
RPTM2
TCDM3

0
1000
VAR
**
0.2
0.2
60
0
VAR

150
0
IABLE
**
20
20
0
300
IABLE

MLIN
2DSH
HSPT
**
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN
MSPT
LSPT

WRAP
WRAP
NB
**
OVER
OVER
WRAP
X10
WRAP

0.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
10
100
10
10
10
10
10
100

Notes

Optional

Optional

1.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

2.

rpim/rptm: as a default, use the time Since Drilled and Data Density from Phase
Difference. The output of the RPIM trace is predetermined. However, a number must
be put into these parameters to prevent MPLOT from crashing. Presentation for data
density is in the depth track.

3.

TCDM: Optional curve for this presentation. Scale should increase from left to right.

8-12

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Double Combo

International Log Presentations


1:500 METRIC DEFAULT LOG FORMATS (correlation)
LIMESTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear

Trace
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Track 3: Linear

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smoot
h

Pen Up

GRAM
ROPS1
TCDM2
TVD3
RPCM
RACM
NPLM

0
100
0
VAR
0.2
0.2
45

150
0
250
IABLE
20
20
-15

MLIN
5DSH
LSPT
HSPT
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
OVER
OVER
WRAP

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
10
100
100
10
10
10

Track
1
1
1
1
2
2
3

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Notes

Optional

SANDSTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear
Trace
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Track
1
1
1
1
2
2
3

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

GRAM
ROPS1
TCDM

0
100
0
VAR
0.2
0.2
60

150
0
250
IABLE
20
20
0

MLIN
5DSH
LSPT
HSPT
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
OVER
OVER
WRAP

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
10
100
100
10
10
10

TVD3
RPCM
RACM
NPSM

Notes

Optional

1.

ROPS: Default units are ft/hr. Other default units and scales are 100 - 0 m/hr, 60 - 0
min/ft, 60 - 0 min/m, 10 - 0 ft/min, 10 - 0 m/min. Default for averaging is also feet.
Metric equivalent is 2.0 (for 1:500) and 1.0 (for 1:200). Scale may need to be adjusted
to accommodate the gamma ray trace (see Rate of Penetration on page 2-3 and
Gamma Ray on page 2-4 for recommendations).

2.

TCDM: Default units are Celsius. Other default units and scales are 0 - 250F.

3.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

Note: WBCS (Weight on Bit) is omitted from these double


combo presentations. If weight on bit is requested by the
client, it is preferred to generate a separate DPR log with
WBCS and ROPS in track 3 (Eastern Region default
format for DPR). Placement of weight on bit in track 3
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

8-13
Confidential

Double Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards


with neutron porosity should be avoided unless there is
consent from the client.
Note: Pen up intervals are in feet. Metric equivalent is 3 meters
(for 10 feet) and 30 meters (for 100 feet).

1:200 METRIC DEFAULT LOG FORMATS (quantitative)


LIMESTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
1
1
LHDD
2
2
3
3

GRAM
TCDM1
TVD2
RPIM3
RPCM
RACM
NPLM
RPTM3

0
0
VAR
**
0.2
0.2
45
0

150
250
IABLE
**
20
20
-15
600

MLIN
LSPT
HSPT
**
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
**
OVER
OVER
WRAP
X10

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
100
100
10
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional

SANDSTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
1
1
LHDD
2
2
3
3

GRAM
TCDM1
TVD2
RPIM3
RPCM
RACM
NPSM
RPTM3

0
0
VAR
**
0.2
0.2
60
0

150
250
IABL
E
**
20
20
0
600

MLIN
LSPT
HSPT
**
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
**
OVER
OVER
WRAP
X10

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
100
100
10
10
10
10
10

8-14

Notes

Optional

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Double Combo

1.

TCDM: Optional curve for this presentation. Default units are Celsius. Other default
units and scales are 0 - 250F.

2.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

3.

RPIM/RPTM: As a default, use time since drilled and data density from phase
difference. The output of the RPIM trace is predetermined. However, a number must
be put into these parameters to prevent MPLOT from crashing. Presentation for data
density is in the depth track.

Note: ROPS (Rate of Penetration) and WBCS (Weight on Bit)


are omitted from these double combo presentations. If
either of these are requested by the client, it is preferred
to generate a separate DPR log with WBCS and ROPS in
track 3 (international default log format for DPR).
placement of weight on bit in track 3 with neutron
porosity should be avoided unless there is consent from
the customer.
Note: Pen up intervals are in feet. Metric equivalent is 3 meters
(for 10 feet) and 30 meters (for 100 feet).

Special Logging Applications


Near/Far Count Overlays
It is recommended that you consult the Regional Eastman Teleco Log
Analysts or Formation Evaluation Specialists before using this technique.
This application permits identification of light hydrocarbons (gas) without
the benefit of a density measurement. This is accomplished by plotting the
near neutron counts and the far neutron counts together in the same track.
The scales for each (near and far) need to be "normalized" for an in gauge,
clean, "water wet" or oil filled reservoir rock (i.e., sand or carbonate) such
that both the near and far count traces overlay one another.
In a zone containing gas, the deeper investigating far counts detected by the
tool will increase significantly more than the near counts. This is identified
on the log as a characteristic separation between the near and far counts in
the gas zone.
Pitfalls to This Technique
It is important to note that the effectiveness of this technique diminishes if
the borehole size varies. This technique cannot be used if the zone of
interest has a different borehole diameter than the zone used for
normalizing. This technique also cannot be used for sand reservoirs that are
shaley or silty (i.e., sands must be clean).

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

8-15
Confidential

Double Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Care must also be taken when using this technique in a mixed lithology
environment. In fact, avoid using this technique without prior knowledge
of the local stratigraphy. You must be able to distinguish between
carbonates and sands (through correlation with offset logs, etc.). An
overlay normalized in one lithology will yield an unfavorable response in
another lithology. For example, an overlay normalized in a clean, wet sand
may indicate gas in another clean reservoir rock that is actually a water
bearing carbonate. However, without prior knowledge of the stratigraphy,
this water bearing carbonate may be interpreted as gas in a clean sand.
If zones of interest occur in more than one lithology, then an overlay needs
to be constructed for each lithology.
Recommendations: "Methodology"

Identify the zone of interest using the gamma ray, phase difference
and attenuation resistivity.

Make sure there is borehole integrity (i.e., the borehole is in gauge).


Consult the client for drilling characteristics of the formations drilled.
(Do the reservoir rocks typically remain in gauge? How much
enlargement might take place if logging occurs on a reaming run?
Etc.) Your Regional Log Analyst may be able to help with this
information.

Look for a nearby clean reservoir rock (or water leg of the zone of
interest) to normalize near and far counts. Make sure the lithology
used for normalizing is the same lithology as the zone of interest. If
you are logging in a mixed lithology environment, can you distinguish
between carbonates and sands? If not, stop here!

Normalize the near and far counts by adjusting the default scales for
near and far counts provided by the log format on the next page. Scale
both traces so they lie in the center of the track. More importantly,
make sure the porosity sensitivities for both near and far counts are
similar. Once this is accomplished, normalize the traces in a nearby
clean reservoir rock.

Correlate separations between near and far count log traces with the
gamma ray and phase difference and attenuation resistivities for
proper identification of gas bearing reservoir rocks (far > near, in a
gas zone). Be wary of false separations due to mixed lithologies.

8-16

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Double Combo

NEAR/FAR COUNT OVERLAY


1:240 ENGLISH AND 1:200 METRIC DEFAULT LOG FORMAT
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
1
LHDD
2
2
3
3
3

GRAM
ROPS1
RPIM2
RPCM
RACM
NNBM3
NFBM3
RPTM2

0
100
**
0.2
0.2
VAR
VAR
0

150
0
**
20
20
IABLE
IABLE
300

MLIN
5DSH
**
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN
MDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
**
OVER
OVER
NB
NB
X10

Smooth
0.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up

Notes

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

Optional
Optional

Optional

1.

ROPS: Optional trace for this format. Default units are ft/hr. Other default units and
scales are 100 -0 m/hr, 60 - 0 min/ft, 60 - 0 min/m, 10 - 0 ft/min, 10 - 0 m/min.
Default for averaging is also feet. Metric equivalent is 2.0 (for 1:500) and 1.0 (for
1:200). Scale may need to be adjusted to accommodate the gamma ray trace (see
Rate of Penetration on page 2-3 and Gamma Ray on page 2-4 for
recommendations).

2.

RPIM/RPTM: Optional traces for this presentation. Presentation is in the depth track.

3.

NNBM/NFBM: The default scales provided are typical for a high porosity regime.
These scales will need to be adjusted for low porosity rocks (i.e., carbonates).

Note: Pen up intervals are in feet. Metric equivalent is 3 meters


(for 10 feet) and 30 meters (for 100 feet).

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

8-17
Confidential

Double Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

8-18

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Chapter

Triple Combo
This chapter provides instructions on gathering and
processing measurements using the Triple Combo tool. Log
presentations are included at the back of the chapter.

Introduction
The introduction of the modular density sub (MDL) shortly after the
commercialization of MNP has given Teleco full "Triple Combo"
capabilities. The addition of MDL to the DPR and MNP allows for a
greater diversity in evaluating logs for hydrocarbon potential. Similar to
the MNP measurement, this tool also infers porosity. In this case, porosity
is inferred from bulk density. In most cases, the MDL is the porosity tool of
choice. This is because the measurement is not as greatly influenced by
shale effects (the neutron tool, for example, is greatly influenced by the
presence shale in the matrix of the reservoir rock). Another advantage of
this tool is the Pe measurement (photoelectric absorption cross section).
The Pe measurement is used effectively for lithology identification when
the MDL is used in normal density drilling fluids. This sub is typically
located below the neutron porosity sub and above the propagation
resistivity sub in a triple combo configuration.
Similar to the MNP tool, the MDL tool incorporates state-of-the-art
technology. This tool utilizes a 2.0 Curie Cesium 137 gamma source and two
scintillator detectors (short and long). The detectors are placed under a full
gauge stabilizer pad with low density windows. The full gauge stabilizer
permits constant contact with the formation for increased sensitivity of the
measurement. Gamma rays returning to the detectors are sampled using
dual 256-multichannel analyzers. The MDL electronics are also selfcalibrating. This is accomplished by monitoring Cesium seed sources
located in the short and long detectors. The tool is also modular in design,
which means the detectors and associated electronics are housed in its own
sub. Electrical power and communications from the main MWD collar to
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

9-1
Confidential

Triple Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

the modular tool sub occurs over a single wire bus. This single wire bus
maintains communication from the sub to the main MWD collar via
conductive contact rings mounted in the shoulder of each sub and the main
MWD collar. As a result, this sub can be conveniently added or removed
from the bottom-hole assembly at the rigsite as needed.

Mud Types
All mud systems.

Borehole Corrections
Gamma Ray
Tool size, hole size, mud weight, %K (potassium content), sensor type,
gamma API correction factor.
Dual Propagation Resistivity
Tool size, hole size, resistivity of the mud Rm, and constants (base offsets
and temperature characterization constants).
Modular Neutron Porosity
Tool size, hole size, mud density, borehole salinity.
Modular Density Lithology
Tool size, hole size, mud density.

Data Editing
Editing of Realtime Data
Editing of realtime MNP data is not permitted. The realtime formation
records are needed to accurately assign depths to the memory data. In the
event severe decoding problems exist and the quality of the MWD log is
lowered, editing is allowed provided the logging engineer has consent from
the customer. In this case, the logging engineer is required to notify the
Teleco office, then notify the client and request consent to edit the MWD
log. If editing takes place, the engineer shall maintain a separate copy of
unedited raw data that he shall use for processing memory data. Any and
all editing should be prudent. If data is edited, it should be removed from
the database. Under no circumstances should the data be replaced or

9-2

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Triple Combo

altered. It is preferred that questionable data remain in the database. This


data should be identified and referenced on the log as such with a remark.
Editing of Memory Data
This is strictly prohibited. There are several reasons for this. We should
let the client decide whether the data in question is useful to him or not. It is
our job and responsibility as logging engineers, however, to identify data
that is most likely in error (for whatever reason) and documenting this as
such on the log. If the client requests an edited memory log with suspect
data removed, a separate log should be made and documented as such. The
LIS tape should contain all of the original memory data.
When an interval of questionable data is recorded and identified, the client
should be notified and a relog should be recommended. The concept of
re-logging a particular interval to determine the repeatability of logging
sensors is a standard practice in the logging industry. In order to establish
repeatability, it is important to relog a zone where the log response is not in
question in addition to relogging the questionable zone. Discuss this with
the client. If the client declines to relog the interval, document this as well
as the questionable interval on the remarks page of the log.
Depth Shifts
Make sure logging depths are as accurate as possible. This is crucial for
this service. Make depth shifts in the database where necessary. Anytime
depths differ at a depth at kelly down by 1.0 foot (0.45 meters) or greater, a
depth shift should be performed. Depth shifts can be minimized by
frequently calibrating the Kelly Height sensor at kelly down and updating
the depth at kelly down at every connection.

Data Management
M-SERIES
A raw database file should be stored on the hard disk (Winchester) and a
raw file backed up to disk. In the event that editing of the MWD data
occurs, a copy of raw unedited data shall be maintained for processing
memory data (see Data Editing above). If a Winchester is not used on the
rigsite, a raw database file also should be backed up to disk. Provide all
necessary information on every disk label, and use an easy to follow
sequential numbering scheme for labeling disks.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

9-3
Confidential

Triple Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

MDMS
Two file types need to be backed up to disk. These are the raw memory
dump data and the XFER file. Both of these need to be backed up on a run
by run basis.
P-SERIES
The database file should be backed up to tape periodically during the job.
Both edited and raw data are maintained in the same database so there is no
distinction between the two like M-SERIES.
HPUTIL
When M-SERIES (MWD data), MDMS XFER files (RWD data), or
P-SERIES XFER files (MWD or RWD data) are converted to binary files
for plotting with MPLOT, then several file types should be backed up to
disk. These are as follows:

binary.* (includes .fil, .apd, .uni, .idx),

*.cfg (HPUTIL Rev. 2.1 or greater)

setup.fil (Mplot/Wplot formats...formally newplot.fil)

log.fil (Makelog/Head/Minihead formats)

tvddata.fil

newplot.fil (use with HPUTIL versions earlier than Rev. 2.1)

header.fil (use with HPUTIL versions earlier than Rev. 2.1)

comment.fil

These files can be compressed using PZIP and backed up to disk using
FASTBACK with the program Getdata (see Getdata Disks on page 1-4).

Rigsite Data Processing


Smoothing and/or Averaging
M-SERIES
None applied to the database. User selective smoothing or averaging can be
applied when plotting (see log formats for recommended curve
smoothing).

9-4

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Triple Combo

MDMS
MDMS processes raw memory dump data with MWD data and creates an
XFER.FIL. Use MPLOT Utilities in HPUTIL to convert XFER file into a
binary file. Run Squeeze to remove backplots and average data on a 0.25
feet (0.1 meter) interval (see Squeeze on page 9-6).
P-SERIES
None applied to the realtime database. User selective averaging (averaging
on/off, it is recommended to select averaging). Propagation resistivities are
block averaged on a 0.25 feet (0.1 meter) interval. See Filtering on page
9-5 for exclusive filtering routines applied to neutron porosity, density, and
gamma ray data. During processing of data, backplots are removed.
Additionally, user selective smoothing or averaging can be applied when
plotting (however, if the data is processed with averaging selected, it is not
recommended to smooth during plotting).
HPUTIL
If Squeeze is applied to the binary.fil, backplots are removed and data is
averaged on a 0.25 feet (0.1 meter) interval. Additionally, user selective
smoothing can be applied when plotting with MPLOT (see log formats for
recommended curve smoothing).

Filtering
Despiking
Available only in P-SERIES 2.0 and above. Applied to density data prior to
hanning window filter (see below).
Hanning Window Filter
Available only in P-SERIES 2.0 and above. Applied to density data after
"despiking." Also applied to neutron porosity and gamma ray data. This
routine filters as the data is placed on a 0.25 feet (0.1 meter) interval.
Chi Square Smoothing
Available only in P-SERIES 2.0 or above. Applied to bulk density value
using delta rho, two raw data values, and the density long space windows 4
and 5.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

9-5
Confidential

Triple Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Other
Borehole Corrections
Automatically applied by surface software (see Borehole Corrections on
page 9-2).
Dielectric Corrections
Performed as required. This will be a rigsite option in P-SERIES 2.01 and
above. Applied to phase difference and amplitude ratio resistivities when
these data are affected by formation dielectric effects.
Squeeze
Squeeze is required for non-P-SERIES databases (HPUTIL binary files).
Apply to binary files before plotting final logs with Gulton plotters.
Squeeze compresses the data file by removing all backplots and then
averages the data on a 0.25 feet (0.1 meter) average. (For more
information, see Squeeze on page 1-5.)
Quicken
Quicken is not required but is highly recommended for non-P-SERIES
databases (HPUTIL binary files). Apply to binary files after Squeeze is
performed. This application sets up indices for every 100 feet (50 meters)
of log, which speeds up the depth search routine for the MEDIT editor.
(For more information, see Quicken on page 1-5.)
ADDTSD
ADDTSD is required for non-P-SERIES databases (HPUTIL binary files).
Apply to binary file as needed during job. This application calculates the
time since drilled and data density curves for MWD and RWD data.
Calculate from the phase difference resistivity (RPCM) unless otherwise
requested. (For more information, see Time Since Drilled on page 2-7.)
ADDTVD
ADDTVD is required on every horizontal well. This routine calculates and
arranges directional data (true vertical depth) so it can be plotted as a curve.
This is an HPUTIL utility program. (For more information, see True
Vertical Depth on page 2-8.)
Quicklook WDS Log Analysis
Performed at the rigsite as required.

9-6

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Triple Combo

Note: No other rigsite data processing is required unless


incorrect or base offsets and temperature
characterization data and/or incorrect borehole
corrections have been entered into the database. If this
occurs, enter the correct correction factors and
recalculate the database.

Postwell Data Processing


Before Final Logs
Dielectric Corrections
Performed as required. Applied to phase difference and amplitude ratio
resistivities when these data are affected by formation dielectric effects.
This can be performed either in P-SERIES 2.01 and above or WDS.
Inversion
Performed as required. Applied to phase difference and amplitude ratio
resistivities when characterized by thin bed effects. Performed in WDS.

After Final Logs


Postwell WDS Log Analysis
Performed at clients request by Regional Log Analyst. Provides more
detailed analysis of logging data than Quicklook.
LIS ASCII File and Tape
Performed in either MDMS, P-SERIES, LOGWORKS, or WDS at
customer's request.

Rigsite Calibration Verification


Required at the beginning and end of each run. Verification accomplished
using the density verifier and verification menu's in MDMS or P-SERIES
surface software. P-SERIES records and processes verification data and
automatically calculates the variance between the shop and rigsite
verification. Verification data should be recorded on Calibration
Verification page on P-SERIES header.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

9-7
Confidential

Triple Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Quality Control
Quality Control Curves
Data Density
Currently, data density is not calculated for neutron porosity or bulk
density. Use the data density calculated from phase difference resistivity
(RPIM). Data density (integrated) should be plotted on the quantitative log
as tick marks in the depth track on the left hand side.
Time Since Drilled
Since there should be relatively little difference in the time between
downhole sensors, use the time since drilled calculated from phase
difference resistivity unless DPR is not present (due to failure, not in
drillstring, etc.) or the client requests otherwise. This will maintain
consistency between logs. Plot time since drilled as a medium spot line in
track III on quantitative logs. A 0 to 300 minutes scale is recommended
with no wrap or back up. Where the time since drilled curve goes off scale,
provide a remark in the remarks page indicating the length of exposure
time. Reference this remark on the log where the curve goes off scale.
Delta Rho ()
This is a very important quality control curve for the density measurement.
This curve plots the amount of correction (in g/cc) which has been applied
to the density measurement as a result of increasing standoff of the density
detectors from the borehole wall. The correction compensates for the
drilling mud in the annulus (between the detector and formation) and is
largely dependent on mud weight and formation lithology.
Note: Delta Rho () corrections are positive for low mud
weights but may be negative for high mud weights and
carbonate lithologies.
The quality of the density data is considered
compromised with any correction greater than +/- 0.10
g/cc.

Log Quality Control


You are responsible as a logging engineer to periodically evaluate the data
quality of your logs. Generate a quantitative log and inspect the curves for
areas that might suggest a compromise in quality. If areas characterized by
poor quality are detected, notify the office (Eastman Teleco) and the client

9-8

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Triple Combo

immediately. Under these circumstances, the client should be given the


opportunity to recover either lost or poorly recorded data.
Listed below are required log quality checks that need to be performed for
any RWD service. If during these checks you identify a problem area, you
are required to call the office for recommendations.
Note: Refer to DPR Services (see Chapter 7 "Dual Propagation
Resistivity") for additional recommended DPR log
quality checks. These log quality checks should be run in
addition to the MDL log quality checks.
1.

Realtime vs. Memory Data Comparison: A quantitative log is


required for adequate evaluation. At the end of each run after the
memory data has been processed, a log should be made with the
realtime and memory data plotted side by side (i.e., realtime
DP*X data in track II, memory DP*M data in track III [* = L, S,
for limestone, sandstone, respectively]). The engineer should
evaluate the log for depth shifts between the realtime and
memory data. Depth shifts result when incorrect time offsets are
applied before processing. If depth shifts are identified, call the
office for recommendations.

Note: There may be a difference between the realtime and


memory MDL log responses due to smoothing and
averaging which is not applied to realtime data (see
Rigsite Data Processing on page 9-4).
2.

Realtime vs. Relog Data Comparison

A quantitative log is required for adequate evaluation. After


a relog (second pass) is performed, it is important to plot the
memory relog data with the "original pass" realtime data.
Plot realtime and memory gamma ray in track I and original
pass realtime DP*X with memory relog DP*M in track II
(plotting DPR data in track III is optional). Evaluate this
data for depth shifts. If depth shifts are identified, call the
office for recommendations.

If memory relog data is merged with "on bottom" data, a


composite log which contains the realtime "on bottom" data
and the memory merged relog data should be plotted and
evaluated for depth discrepancies. Plot the realtime "on
bottom" and the memory merged relog gamma ray together
in track I. Plot the realtime "on bottom" and the merged
relog in track II (plotting DPR data in track III is optional).

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

9-9
Confidential

Triple Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards


If depth discrepancies occur, call the office for
recommendations.

Typical Log Response


Gamma Ray
The gamma ray sensor is primarily a lithology indicator. It measures the
natural gamma ray radiation which is emitted from naturally occurring
radioactive elements (uranium, thorium, and potassium) deposited within
the surrounding formations. As it turns out, shale generally contains much
higher quantities of these radioactive substances than sandstones and
carbonates (limestone and dolomite). Therefore, the gamma ray sensor can
in most cases easily distinguish between shales and non-shale formations.

Shales are generally identified by high gamma ray readings


(greater than 100 MWD-API units).

Non-shale formations (sandstones and carbonates) are identified


by relatively low gamma ray readings (lower than 60 MWD-API
units).

Dual Propagation Resistivity


After borehole corrections have been applied and relatively standard
borehole conditions exist, the following relationships between Rpd and Rat
should apply.
Permeable Zones
When Rmf < Rw , then Rpd < Rat
When Rmf > Rw , then Rpd > Rat
In both cases, the amount of separation will depend on the depth of
invasion, the relative values of Rmf , Rw , and water saturations.
Impermeable Zones (Shales)
When Rmf < Rw , then Rpd Rat
When Rmf > Rw , then Rpd Rat
Dielectric Formations
Rpd < Rat

9-10

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Triple Combo

Thin Beds Intersecting Borehole at High Incident Angles


(Above 60)
Rpd > Rat
Eccentricity
Typically no effect unless a large contrast between Rm and Rt exists (either
Rm much greater than Rt , or Rt much greater than Rm ). Under these
circumstances Rpd < Rat .
Modular Neutron Porosity
After borehole corrections are applied and the following relationships
should apply. This also assumes the correct logging matrix (sandstone,
limestone) has been applied.
Clean Reservoir Rocks Filled with Either Water or Oil
NPCM reads correct porosity and also reads the same as DPCM (density
porosity).
Clean Reservoir Rocks Filled with Gas
NPCM reads lower porosity than DPCM (density porosity).
Shale Zones
NPCM reads higher porosity than DPCM (density porosity).
Modular Density Lithology
The following relationships should apply. This also assumes the correct
logging matrix (sandstone, limestone) has been applied.
Permeable Zones

Should read correctly unless significantly affected by standoff,


drilling mud, and lithology (low mud weights will yield a
positive ; high mud weights and/or carbonates will yield a
negative ). The density measurement is considered
compromised with any correction greater than 0.10 g/cc.

DPEM (photoelectric cross section) will read too high in barite


loaded muds (over 12.0 ppg).

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

9-11
Confidential

Triple Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Impermeable Zones

Same as above.

DPEM (photoelectric cross section) will read too high in barite


loaded muds (over 12.0 ppg).

Other Requirements for This Service


Surface measurement of Rm and Rmf corrected for bottom-hole temperature
(CDS temperature) required on a daily basis. This data should be supplied
on the header of each daily log with BHCT (see Main Header,
Environmental Parameters on page 3-8 for measurement procedures).

Log Presentation
Log formats and trace scales for Triple Combo Services are more complex
and diversified than our other services. Formats and scales can vary greatly
from each client as well as each region. It is important to consult the client
for preferred formats and scales prior to logging. The formats provided
below are default formats. Two types of formats are listed: combined and
segregated. Combined formats present all of the parameters measured by
the DPR, MNP, and MDL on one log. This is the typical "Triple Combo"
format. Segregated formats typically present the resistivity traces on a
separate log from the neutron porosity and density traces. Formats are
additionally broken down by matrix type (limestone or sandstone). Since
neutron porosity and density are typically run together, the log formats
presented here are the same as those presented for modular density
lithology.
Note: All log formats listed below assume the data is either
realtime or memory data that has been processed without
a P-SERIES system (or with a P-SERIES system "without
averaging" selected for processing) and plotted using
MPLOT. In cases where a P-SERIES system was used
and the data was processed using the "averaging" option,
then it is recommended not to smooth during plotting.
This will result in over smoothed logging traces. This will
most frequently affect the Gamma Ray MWD API and
Bulk Density/Density Porosity traces.

9-12

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Triple Combo

North and South America Log Presentations


Combined Log Formats (Triple Combo)
Dual propagation resistivity, neutron porosity, and bulk density/density
porosity are combined on the same log. For double combo logs, use these
same formats with the exception of the missing trace or measurement.
Consult the client for preferred formats.

1:600 AND 1:1200 ENGLISH DEFAULT LOG FORMATS (correlation)


LIMESTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
LHT3
RHT3

GRAM
ROPS
TCDM1
TVD2
RPCM
RPCM
RACM
NPLM
DPLM3
DPEM4
DRHM4

0
1000
VAR
VAR
0
0
0
45
45
0
-0.25

150
0
IABLE
IABLE
2
10
10
-15
-15
10
0.25

MLIN
5DSH
LSPT
HSPT
MLIN
MLIN
MDSH
MDSH
MLIN
HDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
NB
NB
X10
X10
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP

Smooth
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
100
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional
Optional

SANDSTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
LHT3
RHT3

GRAM
ROPS
TCDM1
TVD2
RPCM
RPCM
RACM
NPSM
DPSM3
DPEM4
DRHM4

0
1000
VAR
VAR
0
0
0
60
60
0
-0.25

150
0
IABLE
IABLE
2
10
10
0
0
10
0.25

MLIN
5DSH
LSPT
HSPT
MLIN
MLIN
MDSH
MDSH
MLIN
HDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
NB
NB
X10
X10
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Smooth
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
100
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional
Optional

9-13
Confidential

Triple Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

1.

TCDM: Optional curve for this presentation. Plot this trace in Track 3 if DPEM and/
or DRHM are not presented.

2.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

3.

DPLM/DPSM: Optional traces for these are BDCM (Bulk Density, Compensated).
Scales are 1.65 to 2.65 g/cc (for sandstone matrix), 1.95 to 2.95 g/cc (for limestone
matrix). Consult client for preferred traces and scales.

4.

DPEM/DRHM: Optional traces on correlation logs. These should be set up with half
track presentations (left half, right half). Accuracy of DPEM diminishes significantly
in drilling muds with high concentrations of barite (typically greater than 12.0 ppg).
This is currently not a commercial measurement.

1:240 ENGLISH DEFAULT LOG FORMATS (quantitative)


LIMESTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

1
1
1
1
1
LHDD
2
2
3
3
LHT3
RHT3

GRAM
ROPS
TCDM1
RPTM2
TVD3
RPIM2
RPCM
RACM
NPLM
DPLM4
DPEM5
DRHM5

0
1000
VAR
0
VAR
**
0.2
0.2
45
45
0
-0.25

150
0
IABLE
300
IABLE
**
20
20
-15
-15
10
0.25

MLIN
2DSH
LSPT
MSPT
HSPT
**
MLIN
MDSH
MDSH
MLIN
HDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
X10
NB
**
OVER
OVER
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP

9-14

Track 3: Linear
Smooth
0.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
10
100
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional
Optional

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Triple Combo

SANDSTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

1
1
1
1
1
LHDD
2
2
3
3
LHT3
RHT3

GRAM
ROPS
TCDM1
RPTM2
TVD3
RPIM2
RPCM
RACM
NPSM
DPSM4
DPEM5
DRHM5

0
1000
VAR
0
VAR
**
0.2
0.2
60
60
0
-0.25

150
0
IABLE
300
IABLE
**
20
20
0
0
10
0.25

MLIN
2DSH
LSPT
MSPT
HSPT
**
MLIN
MDSH
MDSH
MLIN
HDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
X10
NB
**
OVER
OVER
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP

Track 3: Linear
Smooth
0.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
10
100
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional
Optional

1.

TCDM: Optional curve for this presentation. Plot this trace in Track 3 if DPEM and/
or DRHM are not presented.

2.

RPTM/RPIM: As a default, use the time since drilled and data density from phase
difference. The output of the RPIM trace is predetermined. However, a number must
be put into these parameters to prevent MPLOT from crashing. Presentation for data
density is in the depth track.

3.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

4.

DPLM/DPSM: Optional traces for these are BDCM (bulk density, compensated).
Scales are 1.65 to 2.65 g/cc (for sandstone matrix), 1.95 to 2.95 g/cc (for limestone
matrix). Consult client for preferred traces.

5.

DPEM/DRHM: For quantitative triple combo presentations these traces should be


set up with half track presentations (left half, right half). Accuracy of DPEM
diminishes significantly in drilling muds with high concentrations of barite (typically
greater than 12.0 ppg). This is currently not a commercial measurement.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

9-15
Confidential

Triple Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Segregated Log Formats


Dual propagation resistivity is typically presented separately from neutron
porosity and either density porosity or bulk density. This presentation
typically requires one correlation log (DPR only) and two quantitative logs
(one with DPR and one with neutron porosity/density). Consult the client
for preferred log formats.

1:600 AND 1:1200 ENGLISH DEFAULT LOG FORMATS (correlation)


DPR
Track 1: Linear
Trace
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Track
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

GRAM
ROPS
TVD1
RPCM
RPCM
RACM
CPCM
CPCM
TCDM2

0
1000
VAR
0
0
0
4000
8000
VAR

150
0
IABLE
2
10
10
0
4000
IABLE

MLIN
5DSH
HSPT
MLIN
MLIN
MDSH
MLIN
MDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
NB
NB
X10
X10
NB
NB
WRAP

Smooth
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
10
10
10
10
10
100

Notes

Optional

Back up

1.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

2.

TCDM: Scale increases from right to left.

9-16

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Triple Combo

1:240 ENGLISH DEFAULT LOG FORMATS (quantitative)


DPR
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
1
1
1
1
LHDD
2&3
2&3

GRAM
ROPS
TCDM1
RPTM2
TVD3
RPIM2
RPCM
RACM

0
1000
VAR
0
VAR
**
0.2
0.2

150
0
IABLE
300
IABLE
**
20
20

MLIN
2DSH
LSPT
MSPT
HSPT
**
MLIN
MDSH

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
X10
NB
**
OVER
OVER

Track 3: 2 Cycle Log


Smooth
0.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
10
100
10
10
10

Notes

Optional
Optional

1.

TCDM: Optional trace for this presentation. Scale increases from right to left.

2.

RPTM/RPIM: Due to logarithmic scales in tracks 2 & 3, time since drilled must be
moved over to track 1. Presentation for data density is in depth track.

3.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

NEUTRON POROSITY / DENSITY (LIMESTONE MATRIX)


Track 1: Linear

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
1
1
1
1
LHDD
2&3
2&3
2
3

GRAM
ROPS
TCDM1
RPTM2
TVD3
RPIM2
NPLM
DPLM4
DPEM5
DRHM

0
1000
VAR
0
VAR
**
45
45
0
-0.25

150
0
IABLE
300
IABLE
**
-15
-15
10
0.25

MLIN
2DSH
LSPT
MSPT
HSPT
**
MDSH
MLIN
HDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
X10
NB
**
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Smooth
0.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
10
100
10
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional
Optional

9-17
Confidential

Triple Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

NEUTRON POROSITY / DENSITY (SANDSTONE MATRIX)


Track 1: Linear

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
1
1
1
1
LHDD
2&3
2&3
2
3

GRAM
ROPS
TCDM1
RPTM2
TVD3
RPIM2
NPSM
DPSM4
DPEM5
DRHM

0
1000
VAR
0
VAR
**
60
60
0
-0.25

150
0
IABLE
300
IABLE
**
0
0
10
0.25

MLIN
2DSH
LSPT
MSPT
HSPT
**
MDSH
MLIN
HDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
X10
NB
**
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP

Smooth
0.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Pen Up
10
10
100
10
100
10
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional
Optional

1.

TCDM: Optional trace for this presentation. Scale increases from right to left.

2.

RPTM/RPIM: Since track 3 is occupied by DRHM, time since drilled must be moved
over to track 1. as a default, use the time since drilled and data density from phase
difference. The output of the RPIM trace is predetermined. However, a number must
be put into these parameters to prevent MPLOT from crashing. Presentation for data
density is in the depth track.

3.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

4.

DPLM/DPSM: Optional traces for these are BDCM (bulk density, compensated).
Default scales are 1.65 to 2.65 g/cc (for sandstone matrix), 1.95 to 2.95 g/cc (for
limestone matrix). Consult client for preferred scales.

5.

DPEM: Accuracy of this measurement diminishes significantly in drilling muds with


high concentrations of barite (typically mud density greater than 12.0 ppg). Currently
is not a commercial measurement.

9-18

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Triple Combo

International Log Presentations


Combined Log Formats)
Dual propagation resistivity, neutron porosity, and bulk density/density
porosity are combined on the same log. For double combo logs, use these
same formats with the exception of the missing trace or measurement.
Consult the client for preferred formats.

1:500 METRIC DEFAULT LOG FORMATS (correlation)


LIMESTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

Notes

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
LHT3
RHT3

GRAM
ROPS1
TCDM2
TVD3
RPCM
RACM
NPLM
BDCM4
DPEM5
DRHM5

0
100
VAR
VAR
0.2
0.2
45
1.95
0
-0.25

150
0
IABLE
IABLE
20
20
-15
2.95
10
0.25

MLIN
5DSH
LSPT
HSPT
MLIN
MDSH
MDSH
MLIN
HDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
NB
OVER
OVER
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
10
100
100
10
10
10
10
10
10

Optional
Optional
Optional

SANDSTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

Notes

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
LHT3
RHT3

GRAM
ROPS1
TCDM2
TVD3
RPCM
RACM
NPSM
BDCM4
DPEM5
DRHM5

0
100
VAR
VAR
0.2
0.2
60
1.65
0
-0.25

150
0
IABLE
IABLE
20
20
0
2.65
10
0.25

MLIN
5DSH
LSPT
HSPT
MLIN
MDSH
MDSH
MLIN
HDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
NB
OVER
OVER
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
10
100
100
10
10
10
10
10
10

Optional
Optional
Optional

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Optional

9-19
Confidential

Triple Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

1.

ROPS: Default units are ft/hr. Other default units and scales are 100 - 0 m/hr, 60 - 0
min/ft, 60 - 0 min/m, 10 - 0 ft/min, 10 - 0 m/min. Default for averaging is also feet.
Metric equivalent is 2.0 (for 1:500) and 1.0 (for 1:200). Scale may need to be adjusted
to accommodate the gamma ray trace (see Rate of Penetration on page 2-3 and
Gamma Ray on page 2-4 for recommendations).

2.

TCDM: Optional curve for this presentation. Default units are Celsius. Other default
units and scales are 0 - 250 Fahrenheit.

3.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

4.

BDCM: Optional traces for this are DPLM/DPSM (density porosity, limestone
matrix/ sandstone matrix). Scales are 45 to -15 p.u. (for limestone matrix), 60 to 0
p.u. (for sandstone matrix). Consult client for preferred traces and scales.

5.

DPEM/DRHM: Optional traces on correlation logs. These should be set up as half


track presentations (left half, right half). Accuracy of DPEM diminishes significantly
in drilling muds with high concentrations of barite (typically greater than 12.0 ppg).
This is currently not a commercial measurement.

Note: WBCS (Weight on Bit) is omitted from these triple combo


presentations. If weight on bit is requested by the client, it
is preferred to generate a separate DPR log with WBCS
and ROPS in track 3 (Eastern Region default format for
DPR). Placement of weight on bit in track 3 with neutron
porosity should be avoided unless there is consent from
the customer.
Note: Pen up intervals are in feet. Metric equivalent is 3 meters
(for 10 feet) and 30 meters (for 100 feet).

1:200 METRIC DEFAULT LOG FORMATS (quantitative)


LIMESTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

Notes

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

1
1
1
1
LHDD
2
2
3
3
LHT3
RHT3

GRAM
TCDM1
RPTM2
TVD3
RPIM2
RPCM
RACM
NPLM
BDCM4
DPEM5
DRHM5

0
0
0
VAR
**
0.2
0.2
45
1.95
0
-0.25

150
250
600
IABLE
**
20
20
-15
2.95
10
0.25

MLIN
LSPT
MSPT
HSPT
**
MLIN
MDSH
MDSH
MLIN
HDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
X10
NB
**
OVER
OVER
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
100
10
100
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

Optional

9-20

Optional

Optional

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Triple Combo

SANDSTONE MATRIX
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

Notes

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

1
1
1
1
LHDD
2
2
3
3
LHT3
RHT3

GRAM
TCDM1
RPTM2
TVD3
RPIM2
RPCM
RACM
NPLM
BDCM4
DPEM5
DRHM5

0
0
0
VAR
**
0.2
0.2
60
1.65
0
-0.25

150
250
600
IABLE
**
20
20
0
2.65
10
0.25

MLIN
LSPT
MSPT
HSPT
**
MLIN
MDSH
MDSH
MLIN
HDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
X10
NB
**
OVER
OVER
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
100
10
100
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

Optional
Optional

Optional

1.

TCDM: Optional curve for this presentation. Default units are Celsius. Other default
units and scales are 0 - 250 Fahrenheit.

2.

RPTM/RPIM: As a default, use the time since drilled and data density from phase
difference. The output of the RPIM trace is predetermined. However, a number must
be put into these parameters to prevent MPLOT from blowing up. Presentation for
data density is in the depth track.

3.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

4.

BDCM: Optional traces for this are DPLM/DPSM (density porosity limestone matrix/
sandstone matrix). Scales are 45 to -15 p.u. (for limestone matrix), 60 to 0 p.u. (for
sandstone matrix). Consult client for preferred traces.

5.

DPEM/DRHM: For quantitative triple combo presentations these traces should be


setup with half track presentations (left half, right half). Accuracy of DPEM
diminishes significantly in drilling muds with high concentrations of barite (typically
greater than 12.0 ppg). This is currently not a commercial measurement.

Note: ROPS (Rate of Penetration) and WBCS (Weight on Bit)


are omitted from these triple combo presentations. If rate
of penetration and/or weight on bit are requested by the
client, it is preferred to generate a separate DPR log with
WBCS and ROPS in Track 3 (international default log
format for DPR). Placement of rate of penetration and/or
weight on bit in track 3 with neutron porosity should be
avoided unless there is consent from the customer.
Note: Pen up intervals are in feet. Metric equivalent is 3 meters
(for 10 feet) and 30 meters (for 100 feet).

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

9-21
Confidential

Triple Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Segregated Log Formats


Dual propagation resistivity is typically presented separately from neutron
porosity and either density porosity or bulk density. This presentation
typically requires one 1 or 2 inch log (DPR only) and two 5 inch logs (one
with DPR and one with neutron porosity/density). Consult the client for
preferred log formats.

1:500 METRIC DEFAULT LOG FORMATS (Correlation)


DPR
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

1
1
1
2
2
3
3

GRAM
TCDM1
TVD2
RPCM
RACM
ROPS3
WBCS4

0
0
VAR
0.2
0.2
100
0

150
250
IABLE
20
20
0
100

MLIN
MSPT
HSPT
MLIN
MDSH
5LIN
MDSH

WRAP
WRAP
NB
OVER
OVER
WRAP
WRAP

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
100
100
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional

1.

TCDM: Optional curve for this presentation. Default units are Celsius. Other default
units and scales are 0 - 250 Fahrenheit.

2.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

3.

ROPS: Default units are ft/hr. Other default units and scales are 100 - 0 m/hr, 60 - 0
min/ft, 60 - 0 min/m, 10 - 0 ft/min, 10 - 0 m/min. Default for averaging is also feet.
Metric equivalent is 2.0 (for 1:500) and 1.0 (for 1:200). Scale may need to be adjusted
to accommodate the gamma ray trace (see Rate of Penetration on page 2-3 and
Gamma Ray on page 2-4 for recommendations).

4.

WBCS: Default units are K-lbs. Optional units and scales are 0 - 50 Tonnes, 0 - 500
KN.

9-22

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Triple Combo

1:200 METRIC DEFAULT LOG FORMATS (quantitative)


DPR
Track 1: Linear

Track 2: 2 Cycle Log

Track 3: 2 Cycle Log

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
1
1
1
1
LHDD
2&3
2&3

GRAM
ROPS
TCDM1
RPTM2
TVD3
RPIM2
RPCM
RACM

0
100
0
0
VAR
**
0.2
0.2

150
0
250
600
IABLE
**
2000
2000

MLIN
2DSH
MSPT
MSPT
HSPT
**
MLIN
MDSH

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
X10
NB
**
OVER
OVER

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
10
100
10
100
10
10
10

Notes

Optional

1.

TCDM: Default units are Celsius. Other default units and scales are 0 - 250F.

2.

RPTM/RPIM: Due to logarithmic scales in tracks 2 & 3, time since drilled must be
moved over to track 1. As a default, use the time since drilled and data density from
phase difference. The output of the RPIM trace is predetermined. However, a number
must be put into these parameters to prevent MPLOT from crashing. Presentation for
data density is in the depth track.

3.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

NEUTRON POROSITY / DENSITY (LIMESTONE MATRIX)


Track 1: Linear

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
1
1
1
1
LHDD
2&3
2&3
2
3

GRAM
ROPS1
TCDM2
RPTM3
TVD4
RPIM3
NPLM
BDCM5
DPEM6
DRHM

0
100
0
0
VAR
**
45
1.95
0
-0.25

150
0
250
600
IABLE
**
-15
2.95
10
0.25

MLIN
2DSH
LSPT
MSPT
HSPT
**
MDSH
MLIN
HDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
X10
NB
**
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
10
100
10
100
10
10
10
10
10

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Notes

Optional
Optional

9-23
Confidential

Triple Combo

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

NEUTRON POROSITY / DENSITY (SANDSTONE MATRIX)


Track 1: Linear

Track 2: Linear

Track 3: Linear

Trace

Track

Param

Ledge

Redge

Line

Mode

Smooth

Pen Up

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
1
1
1
1
LHDD
2&3
2&3
2
3

GRAM
ROPS1
TCDM2
RPTM3
TVD4
RPIM3
NPSM
BDCM5
DPEM6
DRHM

0
100
0
0
VAR
**
60
1.65
0
-0.25

150
0
250
600
IABLE
**
0
2.65
10
0.25

MLIN
2DSH
LSPT
MSPT
HSPT
**
MDSH
MLIN
HDSH
MSPT

WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
X10
NB
**
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP
WRAP

0.25
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
10
100
10
100
10
10
10
10
10

Notes

Optional
Optional

1.

ROPS: Default units are ft/hr. Other default units and scales are 100 - 0 m/hr, 60 - 0
min/ft, 60 - 0 min/m, 10 - 0 ft/min, 10 - 0 m/min. Default for averaging is also feet.
Metric equivalent is 2.0 (for 1:500 metric) and 1.0 (for 1:200 metric).

2.

TCDM: Default units are Celsius. Other default units and scales are 0 - 250F.

3.

RPTM/RPIM: Since track 3 is occupied by DRHM, time since drilled must be moved
over to track 1. As a default, use time since drilled and data density from phase
difference. The output of the RPIM trace is predetermined. However, a number must
be put into these parameters to prevent MPLOT from crashing. Presentation for data
density is in the depth track.

4.

TVD: Optional trace used specifically for horizontal well applications. Scale
increases from right to left.

5.

BDCM: Optional traces for this is DPLM/DPSM (density porosity limestone matrix/
sandstone matrix). Default scales are 45 to -15 (for limestone matrix), 60 to 0 (for
sandstone matrix). Consult client for preferred scales.

6.

DPEM: Accuracy of this measurement diminishes significantly in drilling muds with


high concentrations of barite (typically mud density greater than 12.0 ppg). Currently
is not a commercial measurement.

9-24

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Appendix

Mnemonics Listing
Axis Magnetic Field
AMFX - Axis Magnetic Field [MWD]|gauss

Attenuation
ATB1 - Attenuation Base [R1]|-dB
ATB2 - Attenuation Base [R2]|-dB
ATB3 - Attenuation Base [R3]|-dB
ATB4 - Attenuation Base [R4]|-dB
ATBMT - Attenuation [RWD] [-TVD]&BASE|-dB
ATBM - Attenuation Base [RWD]|-dB
ATBXT - Attenuation [MWD] [-TVD]&BASE|-dB
ATBX - Attenuation Base [MWD]|-dB
ATC% - Change Ratio Base [POST]|%
ATC1 - Attenuation CORRECTED [R1], -dB
ATC2 - Attenuation CORRECTED [R2], -dB
ATC3 - Attenuation CORRECTED [R3], -dB
ATC4 - Attenuation CORRECTED [R4], -dB
ATCM - Attenuation CORRECTED [RWD], -dB
ATCP - Attenuation [POST]&BOREHOLE CORRECTED, -dB
ATCX - Attenuation CORRECTED [MWD], -dB
ATOM - Attenuation Offset [RWD], -dB
ATOX - Attenuation Offset [MWD], -dB

Axial
AXBX - Axial Strain [MWD], mV/V
AXOX - Axial (Tare) Offset [MWD], mV/V

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

A-1
Confidential

Mnemonics Listing

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Azimuth
AZNX - Non-Rotating True Azimuth [MWD], degree
AZRX - Rotating True Azimuth [MWD], degree
AZT - Azimuth - True (Posted), degree

Bending Moment
BABX - Bending Moment Angle [MWD], degree
BMBX - Bending Moment Magnitude [MWD], ft-lbs

Bulk Density
BDC1 - Bulk Density Compensated [Relog 1], g/cc
BDC2 - Bulk Density Compensated [Relog 2], g/cc
BDC3 - Bulk Density Compensated [Relog 3], g/cc
BDC4 - Bulk Density Compensated [Relog 4], g/cc
BDCMT - Bulk Density Compensated [RWD] [-TVD], g/cc
BDCM - Bulk Density Compensated [RWD], g/cc
BDCX - Bulk Density Compensated [MWD], g/cc

Conductivity
CAA1 - Attenuation Conductivity APPARENT [Relog 1], mmho/m
CAA2 - Attenuation Conductivity APPARENT [Relog 2], mmho/m
CAA3 - Attenuation Conductivity APPARENT [Relog 3], mmho/m
CAA4 - Attenuation Conductivity APPARENT [Relog 4], mmho/m
CAAM - Attenuation Conductivity APPARENT [RWD], mmho/m
CAAX - Attenuation Conductivity APPARENT [MWD], mmho/m
CAC1 - Attenuation Conductivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [Relog 1],
mmho/m
CAC2 - Attenuation Conductivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [Relog 2],
mmho/m
CAC3 - Attenuation Conductivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [Relog 3],
mmho/m
CAC4 - Attenuation Conductivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [Relog 4],
mmho/m

A-2

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Mnemonics Listing

CACM - Attenuation Conductivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [RWD],


mmho/m
CACX - Attenuation Conductivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [MWD],
mmho/m
CPA1 - Phase Difference Conductivity APPARENT [Relog 1], mmho/m
CPA2 - Phase Difference Conductivity APPARENT [Relog 2], mmho/m
CPA3 - Phase Difference Conductivity APPARENT [Relog 3], mmho/m
CPA4 - Phase Difference Conductivity APPARENT [Relog 4], mmho/m
CPAM - Phase Difference Conductivity APPARENT [RWD], mmho/m
CPAX - Phase Difference Conductivity APPARENT [MWD], mmho/m
CPC1 - Phase Difference Conductivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[Relog 1], mmho/m
CPC2 - Phase Difference Conductivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[Relog 2], mmho/m
CPC3 - Phase Difference Conductivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[Relog 3], mmho/m
CPC4 - Phase Difference Conductivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[Relog 4], mmho/m
CPCM - Phase Difference Conductivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[RWD], mmho/m
CPCX - Phase Difference Conductivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[MWD], mmho/m
CSAM - Short Normal Conductivity APPARENT [RWD], mmho/m
CSAX - Short Normal Conductivity APPARENT [MWD], mmho/m
CSCM - Short Normal Conductivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [RWD],
mmho/m
CSCX - Short Normal Conductivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [MWD],
mmho/m

Dip Angle (Magnetic)


DIPX - Magnetic Dip Angle [MWD], degree

Density
DLA1 -Density Long Space (Apparent) [Relog 1], pu
DLA2 - Density Long Space (Apparent) [Relog 2], pu
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

A-3
Confidential

Mnemonics Listing

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

DLA3 - Density Long Space (Apparent) [Relog 3] pu


DLA4 - Density Long Space (Apparent) [Relog 4], pu
DLAM - Density Long Space (Apparent) [RWD], pu
DSA1 - Density Short Space (Apparent) [Relog 1], pu
DSA2 - Density Short Space (Apparent) [Relog 2], pu
DSA3 - Density Short Space (Apparent) [Relog 3], pu
DSA4 - Density Short Space (Apparent) [Relog 4], pu
DSAM - Density Short Space (Apparent) [RWD], pu
DPD1 - Density Porosity (Dolomite) [Relog 1], pu
DPD2 - Density Porosity (Dolomite) [Relog 2], pu
DPD3 - Density Porosity (Dolomite) [Relog 3], pu
DPD4 - Density Porosity (Dolomite) [Relog 4], pu
DPDMT - Density Porosity (Dolomite) [RWD] [-TVD], pu
DPDM - Density Porosity (Dolomite) [RWD], pu
DPDX - Density Porosity (Dolomite) [MWD], pu
DPL1 - Density Porosity (Limestone) [Relog 1], pu
DPL2 - Density Porosity (Limestone) [Relog 2], pu
DPL3 - Density Porosity (Limestone) [Relog 3], pu
DPL4 - Density Porosity (Limestone) [Relog 4], pu
DPLMT - Density Porosity (Limestone) [RWD], [-TVD], pu
DPLM - Density Porosity (Limestone) [RWD], pu
DPLX - Density Porosity (Limestone) [MWD], pu
DPS1 - Density Porosity (Sandstone) [Relog 1], pu
DPS2 - Density Porosity (Sandstone) [Relog 2], pu
DPS3 - Density Porosity (Sandstone) [Relog 3], pu
DPS4 - Density Porosity (Sandstone) [Relog 4], pu
DPSMT - Density Porosity Sandstone [RWD], [-TVD], pu
DPSM - Density Porosity (Sandstone) [RWD], pu
DPSX - Density Porosity (Sandstone) [MWD], pu

A-4

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Mnemonics Listing

Density (Photoelectric Cross Section)


DPE1 - Photoelectric Cross Section [Relog 1], B/e
DPE2 - Photoelectric Cross Section [Relog 2], B/e
DPE3 - Photoelectric Cross Section [Relog 3], B/e
DPE4 - Photoelectric Cross Section [Relog 4], B/e
DPEMT - Photoelectric Cross Section [RWD] [-TVD], B/e
DPEM - Photoelectric Cross Section [RWD], B/e

Delta Rho
DRH1 - Delta RHO - Density Correction [Relog 1], g/cc
DRH2 - Delta RHO - Density Correction [Relog 2], g/cc
DRH3 - Delta RHO - Density Correction [Relog 3], g/cc
DRH4 - Delta RHO - Density Correction [Relog 4], g/cc
DRHMT - Delta RHO - Density Correction [RWD] [-TVD], g/cc
DRHM - Delta RHO - Density Correction [RWD], g/cc
DRHX - Delta RHO - Density Correction [MWD], g/cc

Drilling
DEF - Drilling Efficiency
DWF - Drilling Work Factor
DXCD - Drilling Exponent - Downhole

Gamma Ray
GRA1 - Gamma Ray APPARENT [Relog 1], MWD-API
GRA2 - Gamma Ray APPARENT [Relog 2], MWD-API
GRA3 - Gamma Ray APPARENT [Relog 3], MWD-API
GRA4 - Gamma Ray APPARENT [Relog 4], MWD-API
GRAMT - Gamma Ray APPARENT [RWD] [-TVD], MWD-API
GRAM - Gamma Ray APPARENT [RWD], MWD-API
GRAXT - Gamma Ray APPARENT [MWD] [-TVD], MWD-API
GRAX - Gamma Ray APPARENT [MWD], MWD-API
GRB1 - Gamma Ray Base [Relog 1], cps
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

A-5
Confidential

Mnemonics Listing

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

GRB2 - Gamma Ray Base [Relog 2], cps


GRB3 - Gamma Ray Base [Relog 3], cps
GRB4 - Gamma Ray Base [Relog 4], cps
GRBMT - Gamma Ray BASE [RWD] [-TVD], cps
GRBM - Gamma Ray Base [RWD], cps
GRBXT - Gamma Ray BASE [MWD] [-TVD], counts/unit time
GRBX - Gamma Ray Base [MWD], counts/unit time
GRC1 - Gamma Ray BOREHOLE CORRECTED [Relog 1], MWD-API
GRC2 - Gamma Ray BOREHOLE CORRECTED [Relog 2], MWD-API
GRC3 - Gamma Ray BOREHOLE CORRECTED [Relog 3], MWD-API
GRC4 - Gamma Ray BOREHOLE CORRECTED [Relog 4], MWD-API
GRCMT - Gamma Ray BOREHOLE CORRECTED [RWD] [-TVD],
MWD-API
GRCM - Gamma Ray BOREHOLE CORRECTED [RWD], MWD-API
GRCXT - Gamma Ray BOREHOLE CORRECTED [MWD] [-TVD],
MWD-API
GRCX - Gamma Ray BOREHOLE CORRECTED [MWD], MWD-API
GRDM - Data Density from Gamma Ray [RWD], pnt/ft
GRDX - Data Density from Gamma Ray [MWD], pnt/ft
GRIM - Data Density from Gamma Ray [RWD], pnt
GRIX - Data Density Integrated, from Gamma Ray [MWD], pnt
GRTM - Time Since Drilled from Gamma Ray [RWD], min
GRTX - Time Since Drilled from Gamma Ray [MWD], min

Gravity (Accelerometer, Raw)


GXBX - X-accelerometer Base [MWD], gravities
GYBX - Y-accelerometer Base [MWD], gravities
GZBX - Z-accelerometer Base [MWD], gravities

Highside Toolface
HTFX - Highside Toolface [MWD], degree

A-6

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Mnemonics Listing

Horizontal Magnetic Field (Magnetometer, Raw)


HXBX - X-magnetometer Base [MWD], gauss
HYBX - Y-magnetometer Base [MWD], gauss
HZBX - Z-magnetometer Base [MWD], gauss

Inclination
INC - Inclination (Posted), degree
INNX - Non-rotating Inclination [MWD], degree
INRX - Rotating Inclination [MWD], degree

Lag Strokes
LAGS - Lag Strokes, pnt/ft

Magnetic Tool Face


MTFX - Magnetic Toolface [MWD], degree

Neutron Porosity
NFB1 - Neutron Far Base [Relog 1], cps
NFB2 - Neutron Far Base [Relog 2], cps
NFB3 - Neutron Far Base [Relog 3], cps
NFB4 - Neutron Far Base [Relog 4], cps
NFBMT - Neutron Far Counts [RWD] [-TVD], cps
NFBM - Neutron Far Base [RWD], cps
NNB1 - Neutron Near Base [Relog 1], cps
NNB2 - Neutron Near Base [Relog 2], cps
NNB3 - Neutron Near Base [Relog 3], cps
NNB4 - Neutron Near Base [Relog 4], cps
NNBMT - Neutron Near Counts [RWD] [-TVD], cps
NNBM - Neutron Near Base [RWD], cps
NPB1 - Neutron Porosity Base [Relog 1], pu
NPB2 - Neutron Porosity Base [Relog 2], pu
NPB3 - Neutron Porosity Base [Relog 3], pu
NPB4 - Neutron Porosity Base [Relog 4]|pu
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

A-7
Confidential

Mnemonics Listing

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

NPBMT - Neutron Porosity APPARENT [RWD] [-TVD], pu


NPBM - Neutron Porosity Base [RWD], pu
NPBX - Neutron Porosity Base [MWD], pu
NPC1 - Neutron Porosity (Limestone), BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[Relog 1], pu
NPC2 - Neutron Porosity (Limestone), BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[Relog 2], pu
NPC3 - Neutron Porosity (Limestone), BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[Relog 3], pu
NPC4 - Neutron Porosity (Limestone), BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[Relog 4], pu
NPCM - Neutron Porosity (Limestone), BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[RWD], pu
NPCX - Neutron Porosity (Limestone), BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[MWD], pu
NPD1 - Neutron Porosity (Dolomite) [Relog 1], pu
NPD2 - Neutron Porosity (Dolomite) [Relog 2], pu
NPD3 - Neutron Porosity (Dolomite) [Relog 3], pu
NPD4 - Neutron Porosity (Dolomite) [Relog 4], pu
NPDM - Neutron Porosity (Dolomite) [RWD], pu
NPDX - Neutron Porosity (Dolomite) [MWD], pu
NPL1 - Neutron Porosity (Limestone) [Relog 1], pu
NPL2 - Neutron Porosity (Limestone) [Relog 2], pu
NPL3 - Neutron Porosity (Limestone) [Relog 3], pu
NPL4 - Neutron Porosity (Limestone) [Relog 4], pu
NPLMT - Neutron Porosity (Limestone) [RWD] [-TVD], pu
NPLM - Neutron Porosity (Limestone) [RWD], pu
NPLX - Neutron Porosity (Limestone) [MWD], pu
NPS1 - Neutron Porosity (Sandstone) [Relog 1], pu
NPS2 - Neutron Porosity (Sandstone) [Relog 2], pu
NPS3 - Neutron Porosity (Sandstone) [Relog 3], pu
NPS4 - Neutron Porosity (Sandstone) [Relog 4], pu
NPSMT - Neutron Porosity (Sandstone) [RWD] [-TVD], pu
A-8

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Mnemonics Listing

NPSM - Neutron Porosity (Sandstone) [RWD], pu


NPSX - Neutron Porosity (Sandstone) [MWD], pu
NRBX - Neutron Porosity Ratio [MWD], deg F
NRC1 - Neutron Porosity Ratio CORRECTED [Relog 1], pu
NRC2 - Neutron Porosity Ratio CORRECTED [Relog 2], pu
NRC3 - Neutron Porosity Ratio CORRECTED [Relog 3], pu
NRC4 - Neutron Porosity Ratio CORRECTED [Relog 4], pu
NRCM - Neutron Porosity Ratio CORRECTED [RWD], pu
NRCX - Neutron Porosity Ratio CORRECTED [MWD], pu

Phase Difference
PDB1 - Phase Difference Base [R1], degree
PDB2 - Phase Difference Base [R2], degree
PDB3 - Phase Difference Base [R3], degree
PDB4 - Phase Difference Base [R4], degree
PDBMT - Phase Difference BASE [RWD] [-TVD], degree
PDBM - Phase Difference Base [RWD], degree
PDBXT - Phase Difference BASE [MWD] [-TVD], degree
PDBX - Phase Difference Base [MWD], degree
PDC% - Change Phase Difference [POST], BOREHOLE CORRECTED, %
PDC1 - Phase Difference CORRECTED [R1], degree
PDC2 - Phase Difference CORRECTED [R2], degree
PDC3 - Phase Difference CORRECTED [R3], degree
PDC4 - Phase Difference CORRECTED [R4], degree
PDCM - Phase Difference CORRECTED [RWD], degree
PDCP - Phase Difference [POST], BOREHOLE CORRECTED, degree
PDCX - Phase Difference CORRECTED [MWD], degree

Data Density/Elapsed Time calculated from MDMS/P-SERIES


(DO NOT USE, unless HPUTIL/MPLOT is not available)
PDDI - Phase Difference Data Density [RWD], Integrated, pnt/m

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

A-9
Confidential

Mnemonics Listing

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

PDDM - Phase Difference Data Density [RWD], pnt/ft


PDEM - Phase Difference Elapsed Time [RWD], min

DPR 2A Self Calibration Offset


PDOM - Phase Difference (2A) Self Calibration Offset [RWD], degree
PDOX - Phase Difference (2A) Self Calibration Offset [MWD], degree
ATOM - Attenuation (2A) Self Calibration Offset [RWD], decibel
ATOX - Attenuation (2A) Self Calibration Offset [MWD], decibel

Resistivity (Attenuation)
RAA% - Change (Attenuation) [POST], APPARENT, %
RAA1 - Attenuation Resistivity APPARENT [Relog 1], ohm-m
RAA2 - Attenuation Resistivity APPARENT [RWD], [Relog 2], ohm-m
RAA3 - Attenuation Resistivity APPARENT [RWD], [Relog 3], ohm-m
RAA4 - Attenuation Resistivity APPARENT [RWD], [Relog 4], ohm-m
RAAMT - Attenuation Resistivity APPARENT [RWD] [-TVD], ohm-m
RAAM - Attenuation Resistivity APPARENT [RWD], ohm-m
RAAP - Attenuation Resistivity [POST], APPARENT ohm-m
RAAXT - Attenuation Resistivity APPARENT [MWD] [-TVD], ohm-m
RAAX - Attenuation Resistivity APPARENT [MWD], ohm-m
RAC% - Change (Attenuation) [POST], BOREHOLE CORRECTED, %
RAC1 - Attenuation Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [Relog 1],
ohm-m
RAC2 - Attenuation Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [Relog 2],
ohm-m
RAC3 - Attenuation Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [Relog 3],
ohm-m
RAC4 - Attenuation Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [Relog 4],
ohm-m
RACMT - Attenuation Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [RWD]
[-TVD], ohm-m
RACM - Attenuation Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [RWD],
ohm-m

A-10

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Mnemonics Listing

RACP - Attenuation Resistivity [POST], BOREHOLE CORRECTED,


ohm-m
RACXT - Attenuation Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [MWD]
[-TVD], ohm-m
RACX - Attenuation Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [MWD],
ohm-m
RADM - Data Density from Attenuation Resistivity [RWD], pnt/ft
RADX - Data Density from Attenuation Resistivity [MWD], pnt/ft
RAIM - Data Density,Integrated from Attenuation Resistivity [RWD], pnt
RAIX - Data Density,Integrated from Attenuation Resistivity [MWD], pnt
RATM - Time Since Drilled from Attenuation Resistivity [RWD], min
RATX - Time Since Drilled from Attenuation Resistivity [MWD], min

Resistivity (Mud)
RMAX - Mud Resistivity [MWD], ohm-m

Rate of Penetration
ROPS - Rate of Penetration, ft/hr

Resistivity (Phase Difference)


RPA% - Change (Phase Difference) [POST], APPARENT, %
RPA1 - Phase Difference Resistivity APPARENT [Relog 1], ohm-m
RPA2 - Phase Difference Resistivity APPARENT [Relog 2], ohm-m
RPA3 - Phase Difference Resistivity APPARENT [Relog 3], ohm-m
RPA4 - Phase Difference Resistivity APPARENT [Relog 4], ohm-m
RPAMT - Phase Difference Resistivity APPARENT [RWD] [-TVD],
ohm-m
RPAM - Phase Difference Resistivity APPARENT [RWD], ohm-m
RPAP - Phase Difference Resistivity [POST], APPARENT, ohm-m
RPAXT - Phase Difference Resistivity APPARENT [MWD] [-TVD],
ohm-m
RPAX - Phase Difference Resistivity APPARENT [MWD], ohm-m
RPC% - Change (Phase Difference) [POST], BOREHOLE CORRECTED,
%

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

A-11
Confidential

Mnemonics Listing

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

RPC1 - Phase Difference Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED


[Relog 1], ohm-m
RPC2 - Phase Difference Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[Relog 2], ohm-m
RPC3 - Phase Difference Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[Relog 3], ohm-m
RPC4 - Phase Difference Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[Relog 4], ohm-m
RPCMT - Phase Difference Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[RWD] [-TVD], ohm-m
RPCM - Phase Difference Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[RWD], ohm-m
RPCP - Resistivity (Phase Difference) [POST], BOREHOLE
CORRECTED, ohm-m
RPCXT - Phase Difference Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[MWD] [-TVD], ohm-m
RPCX - Phase Difference Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED
[MWD], ohm-m
RPDM - Data Density from Phase Difference Resistivity [RWD], pnt/ft
RPDX - Data Density from Phase Difference Resistivity [MWD], pnt/ft
RPIM - Data Density Integrated from Phase Difference Resistivity [RWD],
pnt
RPIX - Data Density,Integrated from Phase Difference Resistivity [MWD],
pnt
RPTM - Time Since Drilled from Phase Difference Resistivity [RWD],
min
RPTX - Time Since Drilled from Phase Difference Resistivity [MWD],
min

RPM
RPMS - Surface RPM (rpm)
TRPM - Turbine Tach RPM [RWD] (rpm)

Resistivity (Short Normal)


RSAM - Short Normal Resistivity APPARENT [RWD], ohm-m
RSAXA - Short Normal Resistivity APPARENT (Amplified), ohm-m
A-12

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

Mnemonics Listing

RSAX - Short Normal Resistivity APPARENT [MWD], ohm-m


RSCM - Short Normal Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [RWD],
ohm-m
RSCXA - Short Normal Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED
(Amplified), ohm-m
RSCX - Short Normal Resistivity BOREHOLE CORRECTED [MWD],
ohm-m
RSDX - Data Density from Short Normal Resistivity [MWD], pnt/ft
RSIX - Data Density Integrated from Short Normal Resistivity [MWD],
pnt
RSTX - Time Since Drilled from Short Normal Resistivity [MWD], min

Ratios
RTQ - Ratio of Torque, N-m
RWB - Ratio of Weight On Bit, kN

Resistance (Short Normal)


SNBM - Resistance (SN) Base [RWD], ohm
SNBX - Resistance (SN) Base [MWD], ohm

Standpipe Pressure
SPBS - Standpipe Pressure, psi

Strokes (Pump)
SR1S - Pump #1 - Stroke Rate, spm
SR2S - Pump #2 - Stroke Rate, spm
SRTS - Total Stroke Rate, spm
ST1S - Strokes - Pump 1, pnt/ft
ST2S - Strokes - Pump 2, pnt/ft
STTS - Strokes - Total, pnt/ft

Temperature
TANX - Annulus Temperature [MWD], deg F
TCD1 - CDS Temperature [Relog 1], deg F
TCD2 - CDS Temperature [Relog 2], deg F
Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

A-13
Confidential

Mnemonics Listing

Log Quality and Data Management Standards

TCD3 - CDS Temperature [Relog 3], deg F


TCD4 - CDS Temperature [Relog 4], deg F
TCDM - CDS Temperature [RWD], deg F
TCDX - CDS Temperature [MWD], deg F

Total Gas
TGBS - Total Gas Base - Surface, %

Total Magnetic Field


TMFX - Total Magnetic Field [MWD], gauss

Torque (Rotary)
DTQ - Delta Torque On Bit, ft-lbs
NTQ - Normalized Torque, mV/V
TQBX - Torque Strain [MWD], mV/V
TQCS - Surface Torque, ft-lbs
TQCX - True Torque On Bit [MWD], ft-lbs
TQOX - Torque (Tare) Offset [MWD], mV/V

True Vertical Depth


TVD - True Vertical Depth, ft

Weight On Bit
WBCS - Surface Weight On Bit, k-lbs
WBCX - True Weight On Bit [MWD], k-lbs
DWB - Delta Weight On Bit, k-lbs

A-14

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / January 1996

Appendix

Chart Calibration and Accuracy Test


Provided in this appendix are the instructions for calibrating
the ST-250 and Multiscan (Rev. 3.00) Gulton wellogger
thermal plotters.

It is important to note that before calibrating the Gulton plotter, you must
first identify the software version that is loaded into it. To do this, press the
[Advance] button. The plotter prints out the model number, software
revision, date, and whether the multiscan function is on or off (the
multiscan function should always be used for plotting logs on thermal film;
this function permits a second burn on the film for better contrast).
When using a plotter with a software version below 3.00, follow the chart
calibration instructions and calibration charts (Table 1) for the ST-250
wellogger. For any software revisions above 3.00, use the operating
instructions and calibration charts (Table 2) for the multiscan wellogger.

Chart Accuracy (ST-250)


The ST-250 has been designed to print with only +0.050 inch error over
twenty inches. Since the ST-250 paper transport mechanism is the friction
feed type and can accept media of different thickness, it must be calibrated
for each type used to ensure such accuracy.
Calibration of the ST-250 is a simple task and its operating system has had
several tests incorporated into it for this purpose.
Note: If the user does not require such accuracy, the ST-250
need not be calibrated and can be used as is.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

B-1
Confidential

Chart Calibration and Accuracy Test

Log Quality and Data Management

Invoking Chart Calibration and Accuracy Test


The chart calibration and accuracy tests are accessible to the user through
use of the front panel Feed/Self-test switch and a bank of seven dip
switches located in the rear of the roll paper compartment. These tests are
also accessible under software control or a mix of both. The following
sections will describe the tests in detail - utilizing the manual switches. See
the Configuration State instructions CCD and MSC for an explanation of
the software commands.

Calibration Test
The first step in calibrating the ST-250 is to determine the error in a
twenty-inch length of the media type being used (film, paper).
Located in the rear of the roll paper compartment is a bank of seven dip
switches. When set properly, they serve three purposes:
1.

Input of the chart error data.

2.

Enabling the accuracy test.

3.

Enabling the calibration test.

Performing the calibration test as follows:


1.

Load the ST-250 with film or paper.

2.

Set the seven dip switches to the open position.

3.

Press and hold the Feed/Self-test switch. The ST-250 will


perform a regular self-test and after a brief pause will begin
executing the calibration test. Release the switch at this point.
Two calibration lines will be printed approximately twenty
inches apart. The distance between these lines will be the key
factor in determining the chart error for the type media being
used.

4.

Measure the distance between the calibration lines. Substitute


this value for X in the formula below and perform the
computation.
CE = X / (X - 20)......inches
CE = X / (X - 500)......metric
where: X is the distance between calibration lines CE is the
computed chart error rounded to the nearest whole number.

5.

Match the value of CE with the values listed in column A of


Table 1. Column B of this table shows the dip switch settings
needed.

B-2

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

Log Quality and Data Management Standards Chart Calibration and Accuracy
6.

After the dip switches have been set correctly, press the feed/
self-test switch briefly and release it. The ST-250 will perform a
normal self-test and read the dip switch settings into memory.
The ST-250 is now calibrated. It is necessary to perform an
accuracy test to ensure that all steps of the calibration process
were performed correctly.

Accuracy Test
Press and hold the Feed/Self-test switch. The ST-250 will perform a
normal self-test and momentarily pause before it begins execution of the
accuracy test. Once the test has started, release the switch.
As with the calibration test, the ST-250 will print two calibration lines. The
distance between the lines should measure twenty inches, with an error no
greater than +0.050 inch.
Note: If the accuracy test is not producing results within this
tolerance, recalibration is necessary.
Film
Accuracy on film media can be maintained within +/- 0.25% under most
conditions. Because tolerance may vary from roll to roll, calibration should
be verified periodically and recalibration performed as necessary.
Chart Paper
Accuracy on paper is limited due to the unstable characteristics of paper as
a result of environmental effects. A calibration test must be made before
each log. Accuracy can only be obtained under constant conditions.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

B-3
Confidential

Chart Calibration and Accuracy Test

Log Quality and Data Management

Gulton Wellogger
Multiscan Operating Instructions
Standard Feature on all Models - Software Upgrade Version 3.00 "August
89"
Multiscan Description
I/C's = U3 and U4 (see Service Manual to install).
The Multiscan print feature is an enhancement to the High Speed Raster
mode which provides denser printing when activated by extending the print
pulse cycle for each scan line to allow more development time on thermal
film media. The increased density improves reproducible qualities in
blueline copy and readability in overlay usage. When used with standard
thermal charts, a darker image can be obtained for enhanced readability.
Version 3.00 software modifies the dip switch calibration function by using
dip switch No. 7 to toggle Multiscan On/Off. Multiscan may also be
controlled with software commands provided. Calibration tables have been
modified for six position dip switch control.
Multiscan maximum print rate is 0.6 inches per second.
Multiscan will only function in the High Speed Raster mode.
All Gulton Wellogger Versatec V-80 emulation interfaces use the High
Speed Raster mode. (Models TAC-387, TAC 387T, TAC-388 and
TAC-392). If you are not sure what mode your specific software supports,
contact your software supplier.
Multiscan Operation
Manual Method
Multiscan On = Dip switch #7 in down position.
Multiscan Off = Dip switch #7 in up position.
The new setting must be activated with a reset command.
Reset method = Activate self-test or turn power off/on.
(Power Off/On is a hardware reset - reconfigure HSR)
Multiscan On/Off status is printed when self test function is activated.

B-4

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

Log Quality and Data Management Standards Chart Calibration and Accuracy
Software Method
Multiscan On = 4B80 0000
Multiscan Off = 4B80 0001
The software method disables all dip switches until:
a) Multiscan is turned off with a software instruction.
b) Hard Reset - Power-up or internal reset command.
The self test function can then be used without changing Multiscan On/Off
state.
Software Version 3.00 Chart Calibration
Manual Controls
Only dip switches 1 through 6 control chart step calibration.
Software Command Data
6 5 4 3 2 1 Dip switch position.
4FXX or (1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 X X X X X X)
Refer to Service Manual PAP-5075 Pages 051 (unchanged).
Correct page 052 item A. from 0.001 in. to 0.010 in. error over 20
inches.
Replace Calibration procedure page 053 with 053-A.
Replace Calibration Tables 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 pages 054-056 with Table
1.1-A page 054-A.
Step Accuracy Calibration Procedure
1.

Before running test set all 6 dip switches to the open (UP)
position.

2.

Load Gulton film media.

3.

Hold the self-test toggle switch downward until the self-test is


printed and the first test line appears. Release the switch. The
chart will continue until a second test line is printed and then
stop.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

B-5
Confidential

Chart Calibration and Accuracy Test


4.

Log Quality and Data Management

Measure the distance between the two test lines with an accurate
inch or millimeter ruler. Use this value in the following formula:
Inch Calibration
(using inch ruler)

Millimeter Calibration
(using millimeter ruler)

CE = (X - 20) 1000
X

CE = (X - 500) 1000
X

Answer should be rounded to the nearest whole number.


5.

Match the value of CE with the values listed in column A of


Table 2. Column B shows correct dip switch settings needed.

6.

After correctly setting the dip switch per listing in column B,


momentarily press the self-test toggle switch to print a normal
self-test only. This will read the new dip switch values into
memory.

7.

To verify step accuracy, repeat items C and D. If accuracy test is


not within tolerance, recalibrate from step A or select next higher
or lower entry from calibration table and run accuracy test C and
D.
Accuracy tolerance = 0.010 in. over 20 inches.

Note: Software calibration procedure can be found in the


Gulton software interface manual.
Use software command 4FXX or ( 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 X X X X X X)
Dip switch position - 6 5 4 3 2 1
Software command disables all dip switches until as follows:
1.

Multiscan is turned off with a software instruction.

2.

Hard Reset - Power-up or internal reset command. The self-test


function can then be used without changing Multiscan On/Off
state or calibration values controlled in software.

B-6

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

Log Quality and Data Management Standards Chart Calibration and Accuracy

Gultcal Software Calibration


This program can be used on either the ST-250 or Multiscan (Rev. 3.00).
To run the program, select "Gulton Calibration" from the HPUTIL main
menu. At the prompt, type C (for Calibration test). This will reset all of the
Gulton plotter dip switches to zero (all open) using a software command. A
self-test line will then appear from the plotter as follows:
____________________________________________________________
ST-250 Rev. 02.02 03/23/91 P3P4
This is followed by 21 evenly spaced calibration lines. Pay particular
attention to the "Revision Number" below the self test line. This is needed
to determine the correct calibration equation and corresponding table to use
to reset the dip switches on the Gulton plotter.
After the calibration test has been performed, measure the distance from
the first calibration line to the last. This distance should be approximately
20 inches (500 millimeters). Using the revision number printed below the
self test line, select the correct equation and table listed below.
English & Rev. below 03.00 CE = X / (X - 20) TABLE 1
Metric & Rev. below 03.00 CE = X / (X-500) TABLE 1
English & Rev. 03.00 or above CE = [ (X - 20) / X ] * 1000 TABLE 2
Metric & Rev. 03.00 or above CE = [ (X - 500) / X ] * 1000 TABLE 2
Where: X is the measured distance between the calibration lines, and
Tables 1 and 2 are those tables found below.
Once the CE value is calculated, look in the appropriate table for the
correct dip switch settings and reset the dip switches located behind the
paper roll on the unit. Once the dip switches have been set, activate them
by cycling the power down and then on again. After the power has been
cycled, confirm the accuracy of the Gulton with the accuracy test in Gultcal
(type A at the prompt). Measure the distance between the first and last line.
This measurement should be 20 inches +0.050 inches. 1/16th of an inch, or
+2 millimeters is considered acceptable.

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

B-7
Confidential

Chart Calibration and Accuracy Test

Log Quality and Data Management

TABLE 1: Dip Switch Chart


Switch Closed (Up) = "C" (O)
Switch Open (Down) = "O" (1)
***A value of zero (switches closed) forces a Calibration Test even if
Accuracy Test was triggered.

DIP SETTINGS
CE

A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

B
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C

O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

B-8

HEX
C

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

00 *
01
01
02
02
03
03
04
04
05
05
06
06
07
07
08
08
09
09
0A
0A
0B
0B
0C
0C
0D
0D
0E
0E
0F
0F

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

Log Quality and Data Management Standards Chart Calibration and Accuracy
TABLE 1 - (continued)
DIP SETTINGS
CE

A
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70

B
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C

O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

HEX
C

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
1A
1A
1B
1B
1C
1C
1D
1D
1E
1E
1F
1F
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
B-9

Confidential

Chart Calibration and Accuracy Test

Log Quality and Data Management

TABLE 1 - (continued)
DIP SETTINGS
CE

A
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110

B
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C

O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

B-10

HEX
C

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
2A
2A
2B
2B
2C
2C
2D
2D
2E
2E
2F
2F
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

Log Quality and Data Management Standards Chart Calibration and Accuracy
TABLE 1 - (continued)
DIP SETTINGS
CE

A
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150

B
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C

O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

HEX
C

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

38
38
39
39
3A
3A
3B
3B
3C
3C
3D
3D
3E
3E
3F
3F
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
4A
4A
4B
4B
B-11

Confidential

Chart Calibration and Accuracy Test

Log Quality and Data Management

TABLE 1 - (continued)
DIP SETTINGS
CE

A
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190

B
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C

O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

B-12

HEX
C

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

4C
4C
4D
4D
4E
4E
4F
4F
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
56
57
57
58
58
59
59
5A
5A
5B
5B
5C
5C
5D
5D
5E
5E
5F
5F

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

Log Quality and Data Management Standards Chart Calibration and Accuracy
TABLE 1 - (continued)
DIP SETTINGS
CE

A
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230

B
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C

O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

HEX
C

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

60
60
61
61
62
62
63
63
64
64
65
65
66
66
67
67
68
68
69
69
6A
6A
6B
6B
6C
6C
6D
6D
6E
6E
6F
6F
70
70
71
71
72
72
73
73
B-13

Confidential

Chart Calibration and Accuracy Test

Log Quality and Data Management

TABLE 1 - (continued)
DIP SETTINGS
CE

A
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254

B
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C

O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

B-14

HEX
C

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

74
74
75
75
76
76
77
77
78
78
79
79
7A
7A
7B
7B
7C
7C
7D
7D
7E
7E
7F
7F

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

Log Quality and Data Management Standards Chart Calibration and Accuracy

TABLE 2: Dip Switch Chart


Switch Closed (Up) = "C" (O)
Switch Open (Down) = "O" (1)
***A value of zero (switches closed) forces a Calibration Test even if
Accuracy Test was triggered.
DIP SETTINGS
CE

A
0 ***
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

HEX

B
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O

C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O

C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

Reference Manual
750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

***

00 *Start
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
B-15

Confidential

Chart Calibration and Accuracy Test

Log Quality and Data Management

TABLE 2 - (continued)
DIP SETTINGS
CE

A
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63

B
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O

C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O

C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

B-16

HEX
C

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential

750-500-041 Rev. A / December 1995

You might also like